JP2019034084A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can prevent the deterioration of game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine performs a specific display which can stepwisely vary a display mode according to an advantageous degree. The game machine can further carry out a special notification which makes a notification of information about a game. The game machine can vary the display mode of the specific display, when a predetermined period elapses following a notification that the display mode of the specific display is changed. The game machine can carry out the special notification even in the predetermined period following the notification that the display mode of the specific display is changed, thereby prevents the deterioration of game amusement.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 29

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  When a certain condition is satisfied, when at least one of the effect symbol and the identification symbol displayed on the display unit moves toward the other and the integration of the two is established, the determination result corresponding to the identification symbol is obtained. There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes a notice effect set to increase the possibility of winning (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-200630 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the notice effect is monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) capable of performing variable display and controlling to an advantageous state,
Specific display means (for example, a start winning memory display area 5H, a changing special figure display area 5I, etc.) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display, etc.) relating to variable display;
Action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by acting an effect image on the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S709, S711, and S172). When,
Special display means for performing a special display whose display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control for performing a special display effect);
Special notification execution means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that performs abnormality notification) capable of executing a special notification for notifying information related to a game,
The action effect execution means varies the start position of the action effect according to the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the action effect (for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display (for example, an icon as a special display is displayed) when a predetermined period has elapsed after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed. For example, a special display change notification is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time, and then an icon is displayed (the special display changes).
The special notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, notification that an icon as a special display is displayed). For example, it is possible to report anomalies within a predetermined period of time)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, interest is improved. In addition, it is possible to grasp the gaming situation even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The start position of the action effect is a first position (for example, lower left of the image display device 5), and a second position (for example, lower right of the image display device 5) that is farther from the specific display than the first position. The start position of the action effect may be more likely to be the second position than the first position.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the effect and the interest is improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
It can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state)
The action effect execution means can execute the action effect in a special state (for example, a short time state) controlled after the advantageous state ends (for example, if it is determined Yes in step S708), the process of S709 is performed. Execute).
According to such a configuration, interest is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The action effect for the specific display farthest from the second position (for example, the hold display with the hold display number 1) is set to have an execution start timing earlier than the action effect for the other specific display. Also good.
According to such a configuration, interest is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The effect effect on the specific display farthest from the second position (for example, the hold display with the hold display number 1) is more effective on the specific display than the action effect on the other specific display. The timing may be made early.
According to such a configuration, interest is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
As the display mode of the specific display, there are a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode (for example, blue, green, red) that can be changed from the normal mode by executing the action effect,
When displaying a specific display that is not an execution target of the effect (for example, a hold display with a hold display number 4), the specific display may be displayed in the special mode.
According to such a configuration, interest is improved.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
The specific display includes a hold display corresponding to the variable display before execution, and a display during execution (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed,
The action effect executing means can execute a special action effect as the action effect for the display during execution,
The start position of the special effect effect may be different from the start position of the effect effect (for example, FIG. 23D).
According to such a configuration, interest is improved.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
It has a movable object (for example, an accessory 200) that performs a predetermined action and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Operation effect means capable of executing an operation effect that moves the movable object to a position that covers at least a part of a specific display area (for example, start winning memory display area 5H, changing special map display area 5I) on which the specific display is displayed. When,
Change effect means capable of executing a change effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state by changing the display mode of the specific display;
A suggestion effect means capable of performing an suggestion effect indicating whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes over a predetermined period before the execution of the change effect,
When the motion effect is executed during the predetermined period, the motion effect means operates the movable object so as not to be covered by the specific display at least when the change effect is executed (for example, FIG. 24). May be.
According to such a configuration, even when the movable object is operable at a position covering at least a part of the specific display area, the movable object operates at a position not covered by the specific display when the change effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to confirm the change mode of the specific display. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(9) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (8),
In the period from when the effect image is displayed to when the effect effect is executed, the display mode of the effect image may be changed (for example, FIG. 25).
According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved about the process before performing an effect production.

  In addition, the following (10) to (18) gaming machines are included in the modes for carrying out the invention described later. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, the game medium is won in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, and an execution condition (start condition) is set. When established, a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter also referred to as “display symbols”) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and a so-called variable display game is determined in accordance with the display result to determine whether or not to give a predetermined game value. There is a pachinko machine that has enhanced the game fun. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol form when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display aspect, the player is in an advantageous state (big hit game state). For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has become a big hit gaming state has a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker that is in an open state, making it very easy to win a game ball and giving a predetermined gaming value to a player. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, various types of effects that cause the player to expect the display result to be in a specific display mode are executed. As such a gaming machine, as shown in JP-A-2015-160056, after a plurality of images are displayed as a specific display, the display mode of the specific display is changed by combining the plurality of images. A gaming machine that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display is known. However, in such a gaming machine, if the information about the game is not notified in a predetermined period after the player is recognized to change the display mode of the specific display, the game situation cannot be grasped, and the gaming interest is reduced. There is a risk that. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in gaming interest is desired.

(10) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state,
Special display means for performing a special display whose display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control for performing a special display effect);
Special notification execution means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that performs abnormality notification) capable of executing a special notification for notifying information related to a game,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display (for example, an icon as a special display is displayed when a predetermined period elapses after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed). A special display change notification for notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time, and then an icon is displayed (the special display changes).
The special notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, notification that an icon as a special display is displayed). Error notification within a predetermined period of time after
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the gaming situation even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above,
It further includes special effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a pseudo-joint effect) capable of executing a special effect for performing either a successful effect or a failure effect after performing a common introduction effect,
The special display means can change the display mode of the special display when the effect result of the predetermined effect is a specific result (for example, an icon as a special display is displayed when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success). Such),
The special effect execution means is configured so that the success effect is executed at a high rate in a period from when the effect result of the predetermined effect is shown to be a specific result until the display mode of the special display changes. Execute a special effect (for example, determine the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect)
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(12) In the gaming machine of (10) or (11) above,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display in stages by displaying special images of different types in stages (for example, when a plurality of special display effects are performed, the special display is displayed in stages. Icons increase),
Depending on the combination of the displayed special images, one of a plurality of types of effects with different ratios controlled to the advantageous state is executed at different ratios (for example, icons to be displayed (icon combinations) are variably displayed) Depending on the outcome, etc.)
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which special image is displayed.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (11) or (12) above,
There are a plurality of start timings of the predetermined effect, and the ratio at which the effect result of the predetermined effect becomes the specific result depends on which timing the start timing of the predetermined effect is (for example, according to the execution timing of the predetermined effect) For example, the percentage of performance results for a given performance is different)
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, the player's attention can be gathered with respect to the start timing of the predetermined effect.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (13),
Corresponding display means for performing corresponding display corresponding to variable display (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control for performing active display);
And a corresponding display changing means for changing the display mode of the corresponding display (such as a CPU 90120 for effect control for performing an active display change effect),
Depending on the combination of the display mode of the corresponding display and the display mode of the special display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, the display mode of active display and the display mode of special display (number and combination of icons)) The ratio of variable display results to “big hit” varies depending on the combination of
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (14),
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect informing the degree of advantage (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a reach effect of super reach);
Special change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a special change effect) capable of executing a special change effect for changing the display mode of the special display when the specific effect is executed; In addition,
The special change effect execution means is capable of executing the special change effect in a manner that has priority over the specific effect (for example, interrupting the super reach effect and executing the special change effect).
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, the special display mode can be changed in a mode that has priority over the specific performance, so that even when the specific performance is executed, the change in the special display mode can be noted.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (15) above,
Provided with a selection means that presents a plurality of selection candidates and can select one of the presented plurality of selection candidates (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 that executes a race effect as a predetermined effect),
The plurality of selection candidates include a first selection candidate and a second selection candidate that has a higher advantage than the first candidate when selected (for example, the success expectation level as a result of a predetermined effect is compared) A selection candidate belonging to the first group that is relatively low, and a selection candidate belonging to the second group that has a relatively high degree of success expectation as a result of the predetermined performance, etc.)
The selection means is configured such that when the plurality of presented selection candidates do not include the first selection candidate, any of the plurality of selection candidates is higher in proportion than when the plurality of presented selection candidates include the first selection candidate. Do not select (for example, the second cancellation rate is set higher than the first cancellation rate)
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (16) above,
The special notification execution means is capable of executing an abnormal display as the special notification based on the fact that the abnormality determination has been performed, and in a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed. The abnormality display can be started even when abnormality determination is performed (for example, abnormality notification is possible within a predetermined period after notification that an icon as a special display is displayed),
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, error display can be suitably performed.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (17),
The special notification execution means can update the display of the number of balls earned as the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, an icon as a special display is displayed). You can update the number of winnings within a certain period of time after being notified that it will be displayed)
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify the number of winning balls.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value for games counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific display change pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the presence or absence of effect production execution. It is a figure which shows the list of effect production | presentation control patterns. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of an effect production. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation operation example of an effect production. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation operation example of the effect production of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation operation example of the effect production of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special display effect execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special display effect execution determination table and a special display effect execution mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an execution timing determination table. It is a timing chart which shows the detail of a special display effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of a special display effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notification effect execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the execution timing determination table referred in order to determine the execution timing of a notice effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of the notice effect when a special display effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in case a special display production | presentation and a failure production | presentation are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation operation | movement in case a special display production and a success production are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation operation | movement in the case where a special display production and a notice production are performed. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 50. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an effect setting is made by the player at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 50. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in the case of performing a race production as a predetermined production. When the special display effect is performed and the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first display mode, and the active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first mode according to the change of the meter display is executed. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. The example of the production | presentation operation | movement in case a super reach production is performed independently is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement when a special display production and an active display change production are performed when a super reach production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in case a specific display production and an active display change production are performed when a super reach production is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode in the case of setting a function of an auto button to valid or invalid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an auto button function.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a holding memory display (holding display) for displaying the variable display holding number (special drawing holding memory number) corresponding to the special figure game in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. The on-hold storage display in the start winning memory display area 5H is generated based on the starting winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning opening, or the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening. The display mode (for example, display color and shape) may be varied depending on whether the start is based on passing (entering) or not.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a changing special figure display area 5I is provided on the left side of the start winning storage display area 5H. In the changing special map display area 5I, an image corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed. The display corresponding to the currently executed variable display is also referred to as a running display, an active display, a variable display compatible display, or the like. The in-execution display and the on-hold storage display are collectively referred to as a specific display. During the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening, the round special figure display area 5I is executed. Medium display is displayed. In addition, during the execution of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning opening, a circular symbol is displayed in the changing symbol display area 5I. A running display is displayed. That is, with the establishment of the first or second start condition, the display removed from the start winning memory display area 5H is shifted to the changing special figure display area 5I and displayed. By displaying the changing special symbol display area 5I, the player may be able to grasp whether the special symbol game is being executed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Good. Note that the size and shape of the hold storage display and the execution display may be different.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, the normal symbol display 20 is set based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied after the general symbol start condition for the normal symbol start is satisfied. The usual game is started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, a special game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable symbol display time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the variable symbol variable symbol is displayed. The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit as a specific gaming state (advantageous state, specific state) in which a round advantageous to the player (also called “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times Controlled to gaming state. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0), in which the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the number of executions of the round being the second round number less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case of reach form of normal reach (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects should be executed in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the side of the effect control board 12 may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the side of the main board 11.

  In the variable display effect of “slip”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2” of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols is displayed. )) In the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and then the display is stopped and displayed again. An effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of “slip”, a predetermined number of decorative symbols are displayed after temporary display of a plurality of decorative symbols from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the display of a definite decorative symbol resulting in variable display. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is re-executed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. is there.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, one of a plurality of types of pseudo-ream chances determined in advance in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result. Thereafter, pseudo continuous variation (re-variable display) is performed. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced.

  Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo-continuous chances in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols change again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach display or variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message is displayed as an image, an audio output, a lamp There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the decorative symbol variable display operation such as lighting, or a reach effect may be executed by super reach. In addition, a notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that the variable display result may be a “hit”. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read notice). The pre-reading notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information of the special game before starting the variable display for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is to be notified. is there. In particular, the pre-reading notice effect that continuously predicts the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” over the variable display of decorative symbols executed multiple times in response to multiple special drawing games is a continuous notice effect. Also called.

  As a pre-reading notice effect, a variable display to be a notice target is changed by changing the hold memory display that displays the number of special figure hold memories in the start winning memory display area 5H in a display manner different from the normal display manner. A hold display advance notice may be executed to notify the possibility of a “big hit” in FIG. For example, a hold display notice for displaying the hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H in a special mode different from the normal display mode at a predetermined timing may be executed.

  In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H, a pre-reading notice effect may be executed also in the changing special figure display area 5I. In this embodiment, the reserved memory display removed from the start winning memory display area 5H corresponding to the fact that the hold has been consumed is shifted and displayed in the changing special figure display area 5I. When the hold-and-hold display is performed in the special manner in the start winning memory display area 5H, and the shift to the changing special figure display area 5I is performed, the in-execution display in the changing special figure display area 5I is also a special aspect. You may make it do. By doing in this way, even if it is a case where a prefetch notice effect is performed in the stage where there are few numbers of reservation memory, the opportunity for a display mode to change to a special mode can be increased, and the interest of a game improves.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display is executed separately from such a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the variation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result. A notice effect during a change in which the possibility of becoming a notice is announced is executed. The in-flight notice effect may be anything that gives a notice of the possibility of a “hit” by displaying the effect image, outputting the sound, turning on the lamp, the action of the effect item, or a combination thereof.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “lost”.

  When the special big win symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special opening game as a special symbol for the special opening game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed or without a reach effect, a predetermined normal big hit combination (“non-probability variable big hit combination) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations ”) Is displayed in a stopped manner. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. Ornamental symbols having even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” that constitute a normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time-shortening control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state is finished and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variable display state is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is “normal”, or after the reach effect is not executed, a plurality of types of jackpot combinations Among them, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. The decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decoration symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has a variable display result of “big hit” This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a normal state or a low base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-purpose game can be executed frequently and the variable display result in each special-purpose game will be “big hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state (special state).

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be displayed in a stopped manner. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. After that, a fixed decorative pattern (a fixed decorative pattern serving as a chance corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  If the winning symbol is opened after the final decorative symbol composing the opening chance is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accurate” There is a case where it is controlled to a short hit big hit state based on that, and a case where it is controlled to a small hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, the winning winning opening is opened after the definite decorative symbols constituting the reach combination are derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbols. The variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “exact” Only when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state. Therefore, the confirmed decorative symbols that make up the opening chances correspond to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit gaming state, while the fixed decorative symbols of the reach combination are short-term open big hit states It corresponds to being controlled by.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are displayed temporarily on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “left ”,“ Medium ”,“ Right ”decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the same decorative symbols in the same state, and then fluctuate again. One of the decorative symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the normal jackpot combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is displayed. A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the round in the jackpot gaming state, one round ends in the jackpot gaming state and the next round starts During the big hit that will be a promising change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state, such as the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state until the start of the next variable display game A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol is variably displayed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The different EXT data is set in accordance with the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types in the case of "". More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command for notifying the advance determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (determination) of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. Based on this, the second start opening prize designation command is used to notify that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted.

  The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the first special figure reserved memory number when the first start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the second special figure reserved memory number when the second start condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start winning.

  In this embodiment, a first start opening winning designation command or a second starting opening winning designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is selected as the hold storage information is transmitted. At the same time, a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. In addition, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” as the winning determination result, and whether or not the big hit type is determined. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) as to which range of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type falls as a winning determination result.

  In this embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 14), whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” based on the occurrence of the start winning. No, it is determined which range of determination values the random number MR3 for determining the jackpot type and the variation pattern type falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small jackpot” and a value for designating the big hit type are set. Control to send. Further, a value for designating a range of a determined value in which the random value MR3 as the determination result is included in the EXT data of the variation category command is set, and control for transmission to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command, Based on the value set in the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is included in the predetermined range of determination values.

  As an example of the symbol designating command, the command C400H is the first symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”, and the command C401H is the variable display result “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. And the command C402H is the third symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and the command C403H is the variable symbol display result “big hit”. ”Is a fourth symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the big hit type is“ surprise ”, and the command C404H is a fifth symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is“ small hit ”. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the variable display result notification command may be shared.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit value This is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α or super reach β is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”.

  Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 5 may be included in at least one variation pattern type among a plurality of predetermined variation pattern types. Each variation pattern type may be configured to include a single or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, a mode of a rendering operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols.

  As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a pattern and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β). Further, the variation patterns with super reach may be classified into different variation pattern types according to the contents of the reach effect (for example, whether it is super reach α or super reach β). Or you may make it classify | categorize into a different variation pattern classification according to whether a predetermined variable display production is performed or not. As another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result decision table, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. Are prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a special figure display is made depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the special figure display result determination table 130B A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the first special figure display result decision table 130A and the second special figure display result decision table 130B, the table data indicating the decision value to be compared with the random value MR1 for special figure display result decision indicates the special figure display result as “big hit”. ”Is data for determination assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). If the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state, compared to when it is in a normal state or a short time state. Therefore, the determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determined values (a value in the range of “30000” to “30350”) is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, The case where the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. The ratio determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state as “small hit” can be varied.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit game state is controlled. In a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a state (highly accurate high base state), frequent occurrence of a small hit gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to an extended game. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table 130A are assigned to the special chart display result of “small hit”. Also good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. In this way, when the high base state such as the short-time state or the probability change state is set, the proportion determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state may be lower than when the low base state such as the normal state or the short-time probability change state is used. Good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second). Depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is a plurality of values such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Assigned to the type of jackpot type.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, the assignment of the decision value to the big hit type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, the predetermined value (a value in the range of “83” to “100”) is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation special figure Is the second special figure, no decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the short-open big hit state is controlled. In the gaming state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the short-term open big hit state where it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extended game .

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of determination values different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  In addition, the ROM 101 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a special figure display result, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, and a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern. A variation pattern determination table to be referred to is stored.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the start winning (first start winning) has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  The second special figure storage unit 151B has been started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a start winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The universal figure storage unit 151 </ b> C stores the general game holding information that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common figure hold storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball in association with the hold number in the order in which the game ball has passed the passage gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the software 103 can be updated by software.

  For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value, and each random number is randomly or irregularly set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. Consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in decorative symbol variable display operations, reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols Has been. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Among the special-fluctuation effect production control patterns, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each effect control pattern, such as a special control change effect control pattern and various effect control patterns, includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of control data for controlling various performance operations, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various performance controls, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120 when a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. In other words, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches one of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to blink a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 or the decoration LED in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to determine the content of the effect by accepting an operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern (special-figure variation effect control pattern) based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. The effect control CPU 120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when the execution of the notice effect is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the effect lamp 9 and a light emitting body such as a decoration LED, a movable member provided in the production model, etc. is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening prize designation command or second starting opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command , And a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and pending storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning a prize, command transmission is performed in the order of a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start area winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. The category command and the stored memory number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “6”.

  The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) each time variable symbol display is started. Is deleted from the stored contents, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when variable display of a new decorative design is started, each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted, and the command corresponding to the buffer number “2” is deleted. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” to “6” is changed to the buffer number. The region is shifted to a region corresponding to “2” to “5”.

  In the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B, for the area corresponding to the buffer number “6”, the command reception cannot be performed normally, and an example in which the pending storage number notification command is missed is shown. Has been. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 10B, the content in the fourth storage area where the reserved storage number notification command should be stored is “0000 (H)”, corresponding to the buffer number “6”. It remains.

  Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning command (start opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command and reserved memory number notification command) stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A Or, a pre-reading notice pattern for execution is determined. At this time, if the command at the time of starting winning is missed or inconsistent, the pre-reading notice effect setting is not performed until the variable information of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). Limited to When a command for starting a prize is received during a period in which the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted (during pre-reading notice restriction), the pre-reading notice effect setting is not performed at that reception timing. The determination information is set to “1” (or on state). In the case of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect of all aspects may not be executed for the pre-reading notice effect that targets the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurred within a predetermined period. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice effect of some aspects may not be executed.

  In the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B, each buffer number (holding number) is stored with a “holding display mode” indicating the display mode of the hold storage display. When the value of the “hold display mode” is “0”, the display mode is a normal display mode, and when the value is “1” or “2”, it indicates a special mode different from the normal display mode. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect of the notice display notice is executed, a special mode is set.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 11 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S205). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S206).

  After either of the processes of steps S203 and S206 is executed, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value that is the stored value of the start port buffer is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S208). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are extracted (step S209). The numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type indicate whether the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, Is used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol belongs. The CPU 103 executes the process of step S209 to obtain numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. Extract.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, transmission setting of a start port winning designation command corresponding to the start port buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening prize designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S211, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S212). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S213). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the process of step S213, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then step S204. Proceed to the process. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S214; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S216). The start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S212 of FIG. 13 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol display results (variable display results of special symbols) are set to “big hit” or “small bonus” by special symbol normal processing. A determination is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern type that abstractly categorizes the decorative symbol variable display mode, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable symbol variable display mode, and the like are determined. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process in step S212 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is the random value MR1 determined to derive and display the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol as the special figure display result, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. Determine whether or not. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, the special graphic display result becomes “big hit” or “small hit” Pre-read that the variable display mode of the symbol becomes a predetermined display mode, and based on the pre-read result, determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. be able to.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first checks the current state of the time reduction flag and the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, to determine the current state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A gaming state is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S401, from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the starting port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current Corresponding to the gaming state, the special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S402). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 in FIG. 13 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data selected by the processing of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and each It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparing. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) it can.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes processing similar to that in the case of the big hit determination range for the decision value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result decision table data selected by the processing in step S402. Thus, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” is sent to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are performed (step S405). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “00H”.

  Subsequent to the process of step S405, a variation pattern type determination threshold value for losing is set according to the presence or absence of time reduction control in the current gaming state specified by the process of step S401 (step S406). The variation pattern type determination threshold specifies a range of determination values including the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and is determined to any of a plurality of types of variation categories set in advance according to the variation pattern type or the like. The determination value is set to determine whether or not. In this embodiment, at least when the variable display result is “losing”, a variable category (“non-reach”) that is a variable display mode of “non-reach” in common regardless of the presence / absence of time-saving control and the total number of reserved storages. "Common" fluctuation category), fluctuation categories (variation category of "Super-reach") that are variable display modes of "Super-reach" in common regardless of the presence or absence of short-time control and the total number of reserved storage, "Lose" "Fluctuation category (" other loss "fluctuation category). Then, it suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not such a variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Are set for transmission (step S407). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “04H”. Subsequent to the processing of step S407, a small hitting variation pattern type determination threshold is set (step S408). For example, in the process of step S408, “251” is set as the variation pattern type determination threshold for small hits. Here, “251” is the maximum value in the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR3 is always a value equal to or less than the variation pattern type determination threshold for small hits. That is, it is determined that only one variation category is provided according to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”, and the variation category is determined.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds according to the fluctuation special figure corresponding to the start port buffer value ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2"). The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410). As an example, when it is determined in step S409 that the jackpot type is determined to be “probable change”, the EXT data in the symbol designating command is set to “01H”, and the jackpot type is determined to be determined to be “non-probable change”. For example, if it is determined that the EXT data in the symbol designating command is “02H” and the jackpot type is determined to be “surprise”, a command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “03H” is set. That's fine. Subsequent to the process of step S410, a variation pattern type determination threshold is set according to the determination result of the process of step S409 (step S411).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S406, S408, and S411, using the variation pattern type determination threshold set in each process and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, The variation category corresponding to the range of the determined value including the random value MR3 is determined (step S412).

  In addition, instead of setting a predetermined variation pattern type determination threshold by the processing in steps S406, S408, and S411, any one of the variation pattern type determination tables is set, and any variation pattern type is set as the variation category. It may be determined whether or not to be determined. Then, after setting for transmitting the variation category command according to the determination result in the process of step S412 to the effect control board 12 (step S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, even when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the variation category is a range of determination values including the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Judgment is made. On the other hand, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination of the variation category may not be performed. In this case, a symbol designating command corresponding to whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is transmitted, and the variation pattern type when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is used. A variation category command that comprehensively indicates this may be transmitted.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13 and the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14 is executed in step S212 after executing the process of step S211 in FIG. Thus, the processes of steps S405, S407, S410, and S413 in FIG. 14 are executed, and the process of step S214 in FIG. 13 is further executed. After these processes have been executed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Or when the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory count notification command (first hold) Four commands called a storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the big hit symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. In this embodiment, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). ). Therefore, in the special symbol normal process, when the execution condition of the special figure game using the first special figure and the execution condition of the special figure game using the second special figure are established (first special figure holding memory) In the case where the hold data is stored in the part 151A and the second special figure storage unit 151B), control for preferentially establishing the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. On the other hand, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the winning order (both the winning order digestion). Say).

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type based on a result of a prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Processing for determining the pattern type as one of a plurality of types, and processing for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern based on the determination result of the variation pattern type Etc. are included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol variable display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal processing in step S110 and the variation pattern setting processing in step S111, a fixed special symbol that results in variable display of the special symbol and a variation pattern including the variable symbol display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed as follows: a random number value MR1 for determining a special diagram display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, and a random value for determining a variation pattern It includes processing for determining the variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols using MR4.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B in the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if the process of controlling the change of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure is controlled by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, in response to the big hit type of “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds” and the upper prize is set to the upper limit number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A process of waiting until time elapses, a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the presentation device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S75, effect random number update processing is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 15 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 16, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a specific display for displaying a hold display or a running display (specific display) in the start winning memory display area 5H or the changing special map display area 5I. Processing is executed (step S161).

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control performs one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received from the main board 11. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Various effects are controlled during variable display. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to the above, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is displayed. Even if it does not depend on the effect control command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the effect control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start specifying command is received and the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit effect processing. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED is executed. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decorative LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the LED for the game is executed. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S161 in FIG. 16 as the specific display process. In the specific display process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning has occurred as a result of a game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step S701). ). In the process of step S701, for example, it is determined whether or not a start winning has occurred by determining whether or not a start opening winning designation command such as a first starting opening winning designation command or a second starting opening winning designation command has been received. That's fine.

  When it is determined that a start winning has occurred (step S701; Yes), a specific display that is a final display mode (final display mode) of a specific display corresponding to the start winning and a display mode change pattern in a pending display advance notice A change pattern is determined (step S702).

  In the process of step S702, based on the symbol designation command and the variation category command received together with the start opening prize designation command at the time of the start winning, the variable display result and the variation category (variation pattern) are pre-read to change the final display mode and the specific display change. A pattern is determined. In the process of step S702, the final display mode and the specific display change pattern are determined, so that the hold display preview and its effect mode are determined as the prefetching preview.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are provided as display modes (display colors) of specific display, and the specific display is displayed. There is a case where a hold display advance notice in which the display mode is changed a predetermined number of times is executed after the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends. Then, as shown in the determination ratio of FIG. 18, there is a possibility that the final display mode will be a big hit in the order of “white” <“blue” <“green” <“red” (big hit reliability) or super reach. Sexuality (super reach reliability) is high.

  Note that the display mode of “white” is a display mode when the hold display advance notice is not executed, and is a normal mode. “Blue”, “green”, and “red” are display modes that change when the hold display advance notice is executed, and are advance notice forms.

  In step S702, first, the final display mode may be determined according to the display result, for example, with the determination ratio shown in FIG. When the final display mode is determined to be “white”, the display color of the specific display does not change. That is, in this case, the hold display advance notice is not executed.

  In this embodiment, after determining the final display mode of the specific display, the specific display change pattern corresponding to the process of change after the specific display is displayed is determined according to the number of holds at the time of winning. It has become. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific display change pattern in the case where the final display mode is determined to be “red” and the number of winnings on hold (the number of holds including the winnings) is “4”. It is. In this case, a pattern PT4-4-0 that remains “red” from the time of winning a prize, a pattern PT4-4-1 that changes in three stages at a time, and a pattern PT4-4- that changes in two stages once in two times. 21 and the like, a pattern PT4-4-41 and the like that change three steps at a time are provided. Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display can be changed when it is displayed as the hold display and the active display of the hold display numbers 1 to 3, and the specific display as shown in FIG. The change timing is determined by the change pattern. For example, in the specific display change pattern PT4-4-2, the display mode changes from “white” to “red” when the hold display number 1 is displayed as the hold display. In this embodiment, the display display change pattern when the active display is displayed is determined by determining the specific display change pattern at the time of winning, but the display mode when the active display is displayed is determined. The change pattern may be determined at the start of variation independently of the change pattern of the hold display.

  In addition, like the specific display change pattern PT4-4-0 in FIG. 19, there is a case where the display mode is displayed in the notice mode from the time of winning, but the pattern in which the display mode changes in the period until the first shift is not included. . This is because the period until the first shift depends on the timing of the start winning, and therefore the period until the presentation is performed may be insufficient. For example, if a start winning occurs just before the end of the variable display, the specific display is immediately shifted.

  In this embodiment, before the display mode of the specific display is changed, there may be an effect that the effect image moves toward and touches (acts on) the specific display. In this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the effect is executed, the change timing of the specific display is after a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift of the specific display. By doing in this way, after the shift of the specific display, it is possible to secure the execution time of the effect effect before the specific display changes. Note that the change timing of the specific display is not limited to this. For example, when the action effect is not executed, the display mode may be changed when the specific display is shifted.

  In the case where the final display mode is “red” and the number of holds on winning is “4”, it may be determined as one of the specific display change patterns shown in FIG. Here, the determination ratio is not shown, but various reliability levels may be varied depending on the change timing, the number of changes, and the like. Note that it is only necessary to provide a plurality of types of specific display change patterns as shown in FIG. 19 in accordance with the final display mode and the number of holds during winning.

  In addition, when it is determined to execute the hold display advance notice for the specific display that is already displayed, the execution of the new hold display advance notice is limited until the variable display corresponding to the specific display is completed. You may do it.

  After determining the final display mode and the specific display change pattern in step S702, the determination result is stored in association with the hold display number or the like (step S703). Based on the specific display change pattern, control for displaying a specific display corresponding to the current start winning is executed (step S704). In step S704, the hold display or the active display may be displayed in the empty display part of the start winning storage display area 5H or the changing special figure display area 5I in the display mode at the time of winning in the specific display change pattern determined this time.

  After executing the process of step S704, or when it is determined that no start winning has occurred (step S701; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display shift timing (step S705). Since the hold display shifts when a new variable display is started, it is determined in step S705 whether it is the hold display shift timing, for example, based on whether the first or second variation start command is received. do it.

  When it is determined that it is the shift timing of the hold display (step S705; Yes), the hold display of the display part of the start winning memory display area 5H as the shift source is deleted (step S706), and the shift destination specific display (hold display) Alternatively, control for displaying (active display) is executed (step S707). In step S707, when the shift-source hold display is the notice mode, the shift destination specific display is displayed in the same notice mode.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a short-time state (step S708). The current gaming state can be specified as a gaming state designation command. The time-short state here may be both the high-accuracy base state and the low-accuracy base state, or may be either one.

  If the current gaming state is the time-short state (step S708; Yes), it is determined whether or not the action effect is executed in the current variable display (step S709). On the other hand, when it is not the time saving state (step S708; No), the specific display process is terminated. In other words, in this embodiment, the action effect may be executed when the gaming state is the short time state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the action effect may be executed when the gaming state is a predetermined state, or the action effect may be executable regardless of the gaming state. Also, an effect effect may be executed when a plurality of types of effect modes are provided and a predetermined effect mode (for example, a latent probability changing mode or a mission mode) is set.

  In the process of step S708, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect may be determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20 depending on whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes in the current variable display. As shown in FIG. 20, when the display mode of the specific display changes, it is decided to execute the action effect at a high rate, and when the display mode of the specific display does not change, the action effect is displayed at a low rate. It is decided to execute. Note that the action effect in the case where the display mode of the specific display does not change is the effect that the specific display does not change even if the action effect is executed.

  In the process of step S709, when there are a plurality of specific displays, for example, whether or not the effect is performed on each specific display in a predetermined order (for example, the order in which the variable display is executed is late). decide. Then, when it is determined to execute the effect for one specific display, the effect for the other specific display may not be executed. By doing in this way, the target of an effect production becomes easy to understand. In addition, when the specific display from which a display mode changes is included, you may determine so that an effect effect may be preferentially performed with respect to the specific display. Further, in this case, it may be limited so that the effect of the effect is not executed for other specific display. By doing in this way, the target of the effect production becomes easy to understand, and it is possible to prevent the production inconsistency.

  A plurality of effect effects may be executed during one variable display by shifting the effect execution timing.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the action effect (step S710). If it is determined not to execute the action effect (step S710; No), the specific display process is terminated. If it is determined to execute the action effect (step S710; Yes), the action effect control pattern corresponding to the execution target hold display number or active display (display position of the specific display) is selected and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. (Step S711). The effect effect control pattern set here is read in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, so that the effect effect is executed during variable display. After executing the process of step S711, the specific display process is terminated.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a list of action effect control patterns. As shown in FIG. 21, in this embodiment, the start position of the action effect differs depending on the display position of the specific display that is the target (action destination) of the action effect. As shown in FIG. 21, when the action destination is active display, the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 is the start position, and when the action destination is hold display number 1 or 2, image display is performed. The lower right of the screen of the device 5 is the start position, and when the operation destination is the hold display of the hold display number 3, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is the start position. Thus, in this embodiment, the position far from the display position of the specific display is the start position of the effect. By doing in this way, since the distance and period which act on a specific display become long, it can be made to pay attention to an effect.

  In addition, with respect to the hold display of the hold display number 4 (the display upper limit number of the hold display), since it may shift immediately after being displayed and there is a possibility that the execution time of the effect cannot be secured, Never executed. However, since the specific display change pattern is provided with a pattern that becomes a notice mode from the time of winning, the hold display of the hold display number 4 may be displayed in the notice mode before shifting from the time of winning. In this way, the player can be expected from the hold display that is not the target of the action effect, so the interest is improved. In this embodiment, since the presence / absence of the effect is determined when the hold display is shifted, it is not determined that the effect is performed on the hold display before the shift. On the other hand, whether or not the effect effect is performed may be determined at the time of starting winning. In this case, when there is a sufficient time until the shift of the hold display, the effect may be performed on the hold display of the hold display number 4 (the display upper limit number of the hold display).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the action effect is started at the start of variable display, and the effect time of the effect effect is uniformly 1300 (ms). This is shorter than 1500 (ms) which is the shortest variable display time. For this reason, an effect (and a change in display mode) can be completed during one variable display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, the suggestion image which shows that an effect production is performed at the time of the start of an effect effect is displayed on the start position of an effect effect. Detailed production operations will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the start position of the action effect is determined by selecting the action effect control pattern corresponding to the hold display number to be executed or the active display (display position of the specific display) in the process of step S711. In the process of step S702, the start position may be determined together with the determination of the specific display change pattern, or the start position may be determined every time the change starts.

  If it is determined in step S705 that it is not the hold display shift timing (step S705; No), it is determined whether it is the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712). In step S712, whether or not 1300 (ms) has elapsed from the start of the variable display and the stored specific display change pattern changes the display mode in the current variable display (pending display number or active display). What is necessary is just to determine whether there exists. If it is not the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712; No), the specific display process is terminated.

  If it is the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712; Yes), the display mode of the target specific display is changed to a color corresponding to the specific display change pattern (step S713). Thereafter, the specific display process is terminated.

  Subsequently, an example of an effect operation when an effect effect is executed will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the image display device 5 when the effect is performed. As shown in FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (B), when the total number of reserved memories is four, the hold display numbers 1 and 2 and the hold displays H1 and H2 and the active display AH are from the center of the image display device 5. Displayed on the left side. Further, the hold displays H3 and H4 of the hold display numbers 3 and 4 are displayed on the right side from the center of the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, when the effect is performed on the hold display H3 with the hold display number 3, the suggestion image I1 is displayed on the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the suggestion is performed. An action effect is performed in which the star image I2 acts on the hold display H3 from the image I1.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, when the effect is performed on the hold display H2 with the hold display number 2, the suggestion image I1 is displayed on the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and then The effect effect that the star image I2 acts on the hold display H2 from the suggestion image I1 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 23C, when the effect is performed on the hold display H1 with the hold display number 1, after the suggestion image I1 is displayed on the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, The effect effect that the star image I2 acts on the hold display H1 from the suggestion image I1 is executed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of action effect start positions (start directions), and the action effect start position differs depending on the display position of the hold display (specific display). Thus, since the start position of the action effect changes according to the position of the hold display, the interest of the action effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the start positions of the action effect with respect to the hold display are the lower right and the lower left, but the one far from the hold display is the start position of the action effect. By doing in this way, since the display distance of the image made to act in an effect production becomes long, it becomes easy for a player to pay attention to an effect production. Note that the start position of the effect for the hold display may be other than the lower right or lower left. For example, when the start position is other than the lower right or lower left, the big hit reliability may be increased, the change rate of the hold display of the action target may be increased, and the number of change steps is likely to increase. May be.

  When the effect is executed for the hold display H1 with the hold display number 1, the distance from the start position to the destination is greater than when the effect is executed with respect to the hold display H2 with the hold display number 2. Will be far away. The hold display H1 is also a hold display farthest from the start position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, since the effect time of the action effect is constant, as shown in FIGS. 23B and 23C, in the action effect for the hold display H1 with the hold display number 1, The orbit of the star image I2 is lower (the moving distance is shorter) than the action effect on the hold display H2 of the display number 2. By doing in this way, even if the distance of an effect | action destination differs from the start position of an effect effect, an effect effect can be performed suitably. The timing at which the star image I2 acts on the hold display H1 may be accelerated by setting the trajectory of the star image I2 to be the same and increasing the moving speed.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (D), when the effect is performed on the active display AH, after the suggestion image I3 different from the suggestion image I1 is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, The effect that the suggestion image I3 acts on the active display AH is executed. Thus, the action effect for the active display is a special effect effect different from the action effect for the hold display. Executing such a special action effect improves the interest of the effect.

  It should be noted that a special action effect may be executable for the hold display, or a normal action effect may be executable for the active display. In this case, various expectation levels (change rate of specific display, reliability, etc.) may be different depending on whether the effect is a special effect or a normal effect.

  In addition, although FIG. 23 demonstrated the case where four pending | holding displays were displayed in the start winning memory | storage display area 5H, you may make it display eight which are the upper limits of a total pending | holding memory | storage number. In this case, the hold display numbers 1 to 4 may be displayed on the left side from the center of the image display device 5, and the hold display numbers 5 to 8 may be displayed on the right side from the center of the image display device 5. And the start position of the effect for the hold display numbers 1 to 4 is the right side (lower right) of the image display device 5, and the start position of the effect for the hold display numbers 5 to 7 is the left side (lower left) of the image display device 5. do it.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above embodiment, the start position (starting direction) of the action effect is different depending on the display position of the specific display, but the change rate of the specific display of the target, the number of change steps, the jackpot reliability, the super reach reliability, The starting position may be varied according to the number of reserved memories. Further, the determination ratio of the start position may be varied based on these. By doing in this way, it can have a sense of expectation with respect to the start position of the effect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the effect effect was performed with respect to a hold display and an active display, you may make it perform an effect effect only with respect to a hold display. When the action effect is executed only for the hold display, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not have the changing special figure display area 5I.

  In the above embodiment, the production time of the action effect is uniformly 1300 (ms), which is shorter than 1500 (ms) which is the shortest variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a pattern with a long production time. For example, the effect time of the effect effect for the hold display number 1 farthest from the start position of the effect effect may be longer than the effect time of the other effect effects. By doing so, it is possible to make the trajectory and moving speed of the image to be applied to the hold display the same as other action effects. In this case, since the time for displaying the image that acts on the hold display becomes longer, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the action effect. In this case, for the effect effect having a long effect time, the start timing of the effect effect (movement of the acting image) may be advanced. For example, the start timing of the action effect with different effect times may be different, and the end timing of the action effect may be the same.

  A plurality of action effect control patterns having different effect times may be prepared, and the action effect control pattern (effect time) may be determined to any one based on a change pattern (change time) or the like. In addition, when the action effect is executed in a pattern with a long effect time, the action effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays.

  When the action effect is started, the visibility of an image (such as a suggestion image) used for the action effect and an effect image (background image or the like) other than the specific display may be lowered. For example, until the action effect is completed, the suggestion image and a display other than the specific display that is the target of the action effect are displayed darkly from a blackout or a player with difficulty in visual recognition. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize and display the suggestion image and the specific display that is the target of the effect, and it is easier to focus on the effect.

  In the above embodiment, the start position of the action effect is determined to be farther from the display position of the specific display, but the start position of the action effect is determined at a predetermined ratio according to the display position of the specific display. You may do it. In this case, the start position far from the display position of the specific display may be determined at a high rate.

  Further, the start position of the effect may be closer to the display position of the specific display.

  In the case where action effects are continuously executed in a plurality of variable displays, the start position of the action effects may be varied for each variable display. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect production is performed continuously from the same direction and an effect production becomes difficult to understand. Further, as the number of executions of the action effect for one specific display is increased, the change rate, the number of change steps, the big hit reliability, and the super reach reliability of the target specific display may be increased. By doing in this way, the expectation to be able to perform an effect effect continuously can be raised. Moreover, you may make it perform an effect | action effect in multiple times in one variable display.

  The effect effect of the gas may be executed from a predetermined direction (for example, the lower left of the screen). By doing in this way, expectation degree can be presumed because an effect production was not performed from the direction which should be performed.

  The suggestion image may be varied according to the start position of the effect. The suggestion image itself may act on the hold display. Further, the suggestion image may be varied depending on the destination of the action effect. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect production is performed continuously from the same direction and an effect production becomes difficult to understand.

  Further, a movable accessory 200 capable of performing a predetermined operation may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 to execute an accessory effect for operating the accessory 200. For example, the accessory 200 is provided on the front side of the image display device 5 in the downward direction, that is, on the front side of the screen of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player (may be another actuator). Configured to be movable. The standby position (initial position) of the accessory 200 is the upper center of the image display device 5. The accessory 200 can move from the standby position to the front side of the display areas 5H and 5I for displaying the hold display and the active display. The accessory 200 may be configured to emit light by a light emitting device such as an LED.

  FIG. 24 is an example of the effect operation when the display mode of the hold display after the effect effect by the character changes. FIG. 24 shows a case where the character CHR-A acts on hold display, unlike the above embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the changing special figure display area 5I is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5, and the start winning memory display area 5H is the left and right of the changing special figure display area 5I (the left is the first special figure, It is assumed that the right side corresponds to the second special drawing).

  FIG. 24A shows the image display device 5 in which variable display is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the active display AH and the hold displays H1 and H2 are displayed. FIG. 24B shows the start timing of the first half of the effect production by the character. In this way, the character CHR-A is displayed at a position where the character 200 is not worn even if the accessory 200 has moved.

  FIG. 24C shows the execution of the accessory effect by the accessory 200. In this manner, the accessory 200 is moved to a position covering at least a part of the start winning storage display area 5H where the target hold display is displayed. Here, the accessory 200 completely covers the target hold display H2.

  FIG. 24D shows the second half of the action effect by the character being executed. Thus, the character CHR-A acts on the hold display H2 in a state where it is not hidden by the accessory 200. That is, the action effect is executed in a state where it is not hidden by the accessory 200.

  FIG. 24E shows the timing of the hold change effect. As described above, as a result of the action effect, the hold change effect in which the mode of the hold display H2 (here, the display color) changes is executed.

  As described above, in this modified example, when an effect effect is executed during a period in which an effect effect is executed, the specific display does not suffer when at least a change in the display mode of the specific display (pending display notice) is executed. The accessory 200 is operated as follows. By doing in this way, it is possible to perform an accessory effect without disturbing the visibility of the specific display. Then, it is possible to prompt the player to confirm the change mode of the specific display. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when performing an effect production in the period when an effect production is performed, when the change of the display mode of a specific display (pending display advance notice) is performed, the accessory 200 is operated so as not to suffer from the specific display. The control for this may be arbitrary. For example, when determining an effect effect and an effect effect by separate processing, if an effect effect is executed, it is determined to be an effect effect effect pattern that does not suffer from an effect effect. Also good. Further, when the action effect (holding change notice) is executed, the action effect (holding change notice) and the effect pattern of the accessory effect not to be worn may be determined.

  The effect (display of the suggestion image) may be started from a position that does not overlap with the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R or the decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size. By doing in this way, it can prevent that the visibility of the variable display of a decoration symbol worsens by an effect.

  Further, as in the modification in FIG. 24, the start winning memory display area 5H is provided on the left and right of the changing special figure display area 5I (left corresponds to the first special figure and right corresponds to the second special figure). The start position of the action effect may be far from or close to the position where the specific display of the action target is shifted (digested).

  Further, as in the modification in FIG. 24, the start winning memory display area 5H is provided on the left and right of the changing special figure display area 5I (left corresponds to the first special figure and right corresponds to the second special figure). The start position of the effect may be different depending on the direction in which the specific display is shifted (digested). For example, the effect may be started in the direction in which the specific display is shifted (forward direction), or the effect may be started in the reverse direction in which the specific display is shifted. May be.

  In the modification in FIG. 24, the effect for the active display may be started from a position close to the accessory 200. By doing in this way, it becomes easier to pay attention to the action effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved by linking the action effect and the operation of the accessory 200.

  A predetermined period is provided until the action effect is executed after the suggestion image is displayed, and the display mode of the suggestion image may change during the period from when the suggestion image is displayed until the action effect is executed. There may be. In this modified example, the action effects of the first pattern to the third pattern are provided.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the effect of the modification. FIG. 25A is a diagram showing a display example of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation. FIGS. 25B, 25 </ b> D, and 25 </ b> F are diagrams illustrating display examples of the image display device 5 at the time when the suggestion image when the effect is executed is displayed. FIGS. 25C, 25E, and 25G are diagrams each illustrating a display example of the image display device 5 when the effect effects of the first pattern to the third pattern in the modification are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed is indicated by three downward arrows. It is assumed that a new start prize is generated from the state of FIG. 25A and that the start prize is accompanied by an action effect (including a gaze effect that does not change on hold). Such hold display will be described below as target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 25 (b), when the target hold TH is generated and displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, the first character image 91 as the suggestion image is displayed. The first character image 91 has a humanoid shape and is displayed with an image indicated by an arrow in the right hand.

  The action effect of the first pattern shown in FIG. 25C is executed during the execution of the change display just before the start of the change display of the target hold TH from the state of FIG. In the action effect of the first pattern, an effect is performed in which the first character image 91 displayed first throws an arrow image that the first character image 91 has toward the target hold TH. However, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the arrow image does not reach the target hold TH and stalls in the middle without acting on the target hold TH. As described above, the action effect of the first pattern of the gusset in which the action effect is executed but actually does not cause a change in hold is shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c).

  Also, from the state of FIG. 25A, as shown in FIG. 25D, when the target hold TH occurs and is displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, the second character image 92 is displayed as a suggestion image. Is done. The second character image 92 has a humanoid shape and is displayed with an image indicated by an arrow on the right hand, and is different in color from the first character image 91, for example.

  The action effect of the second pattern shown in FIG. 25E is executed during the execution of the change display just before the start of the change display of the target hold TH from the state shown in FIG. In the action effect of the second pattern, an effect is performed in which the first character image 92 displayed first throws an arrow image that the second character image 92 has toward the target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 25 (e), the arrow image acts on the hold display by piercing the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from the normal white color (white circle in the figure) to the big hit expectation degree. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure). By changing the display mode of the target hold TH, it can be expected that the hold display becomes a big hit.

  Also, from the state of FIG. 25A, as shown in FIG. 25F, when the target hold TH is generated and displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, the first character image 91 as a suggestion image is displayed. Is done.

  The action effect of the third pattern shown in FIG. 25 (g) is executed during the execution of the change display just before the start of the change display of the target hold TH from the state of FIG. 25 (f). In the action effect of the third pattern, the character image is changed from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92 in a predetermined period until the effect that the first character image 91 displayed first throws an arrow image is executed. Change. Specifically, the character image changes from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92 during the execution of the variable display immediately before the variable display of the target hold TH is started. Then, an effect is performed in which the second character image 92 throws the arrow image it has toward the target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 25 (g), the arrow image acts on the hold display by sticking to the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from normal white (white circle in the figure) to the big hit expectation. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure). By executing such action effects, attention can be paid to the process of action effects, and the interest of the game is improved. The display timing of the suggestion image, the change timing of the character image, and the action timing of the image with respect to the hold display may be any timing from when the target hold is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the target hold is ended. .

  In this modified example, the ratio and the reliability of the hold display change are higher when the second character image 92 is displayed than when the first character image 91 is displayed as the suggestion image. do it. And by providing the 3rd pattern from which the 1st character image 91 changes to the 2nd character image 92 before an effect production is performed, even when the 1st character image 91 with low expectation is displayed, expectation degree Since the second character image 92 may be changed to a high character character 92, the player's expectation can be maintained. It should be noted that the second pattern and the third pattern may have the same expectation (the ratio or reliability with which the hold display changes), or either one may be higher. If the third pattern has a higher expectation, even if a suggestion image with a lower expectation is displayed, the expectation will be higher if the suggestion image changes, so the player's expectation will be maintained more Can do.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. Although an example in which the pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) is so-called in the case where the first command is not reached, such as the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (for example, the previous variation pattern) of the second stop) is transmitted. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after reaching reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold storage display in the pre-reading notice effect is generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, or the second Although it was the same regardless of whether the game ball was generated based on the start winning by passing (entering) the game winning opening, the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening The display mode (color, shape, etc.) depends on whether it is generated based on the start winning or based on the starting winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the second start winning opening. ) May be different.

  Further, in the process of step S403 shown in FIG. 14, determination is performed using the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402. As described above, as the big hit determination data indicating the big hit determination range used for determining whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, a predetermined number when the gaming state is not the probability variation state (high probability state). Data for the normal determination including the jackpot determination value and special determination data including a larger number of jackpot determination values than the predetermined number when the game state is in a probabilistic state, and when the start winning occurs When the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the variable display result is determined using the normal determination data. On the other hand, when the gaming state when the start winning is generated is the probability variation state, the variable display result is obtained using the special determination data. judge. Here, when the gaming state is a probable change state, the variable display result is determined as “big hit” using the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning prize. And when determining that the jackpot type is determined to be “non-probable change” using the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and it is determined that the probability change control is not performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, You may restrict execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning which occurred within the period until the probability variation control ends based on the display result in the variable display which is the object of the determination. As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the determination result that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” using the special determination data corresponding to the probability variation state, even though the probability variation control ends. It is possible to prevent this and to maintain the consistency of the production contents.

  In the above embodiment, the special game using the first special figure is executed based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the game that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. The description has been made on the assumption that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed based on the detection of the sphere. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special game using a common special symbol is executed regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It may be a thing.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid game ball (which may be a rental ball) into the game area to play a game. Although it was a gaming machine, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values having a size specified by the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention is also applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a given game score or a game score given by winning a game. Can do.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for displaying the display result. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  Only one type of out-of-order symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. . Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above embodiment, the pre-reading determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub-side, but the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the pre-reading determination is performed on the sub-side. You may do it.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to change the gaming state after the big hit gaming state to the “probable change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the fluctuation is determined. Round mode) is determined only (specify by type of jackpot, etc.), and the jackpot game is based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the jackpot game state. The game state after the state may be changed to the “probability change state”.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state,
Specific display means (for example, a start winning memory display area 5H, a changing special figure display area 5I, etc.) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display, etc.) relating to variable display;
Action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by acting an effect image on the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S709, S711, and S172). When,
Special display means for performing a special display whose display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control for performing a special display effect);
Special notification execution means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that performs abnormality notification) capable of executing a special notification for notifying information related to a game,
The action effect execution means varies the start position of the action effect according to the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the action effect (for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display (for example, an icon as a special display is displayed) when a predetermined period has elapsed after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed. For example, a special display change notification is performed continuously for a predetermined period of time, and then an icon is displayed (the special display changes).
The special notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, notification that an icon as a special display is displayed). For example, it is possible to report anomalies within a predetermined period of time)
A gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to the above gaming machine, interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to grasp the gaming situation even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the above gaming machine, an effect or special notification with a special display may be executed during the display of the specific display from the viewpoint of further enhancing the interest. Furthermore, special notification regarding the specific display or action effect may be executed. Moreover, when the special alert | report regarding an effect production is performed, the execution timing etc. of an effect display may change. Moreover, the special alert | report regarding an effect production may be performed before execution of an effect effect, and may be performed after execution of an effect effect. Furthermore, the special notification regarding the effect effect may be executed together with the execution of the effect effect. In addition, the special alert | report regarding an effect production may be performed before execution of an effect effect, and may be performed again after execution of an effect effect.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine, the display mode of the special display and the mode of the special notification may be changed depending on the display mode of the specific display from the point of improving the interest. Moreover, the display mode of special display and the mode of special notification may change depending on the mode of action effect.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can grasp the gaming situation even in a predetermined period after it is informed that the display mode of the special display is changed, and can prevent a decrease in gaming interests,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state,
Special display means for performing a special display whose display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control for performing a special display effect);
Special notification execution means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that performs abnormality notification) capable of executing a special notification for notifying information related to a game,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display (for example, an icon as a special display is displayed when a predetermined period elapses after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed). A special display change notification for notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time, and then an icon is displayed (the special display changes).
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, it is notified that an icon as a special display is displayed). For example, it is possible to report an abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter)
A gaming machine characterized by this. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, an embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 26 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 26, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are both formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”). May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. Then, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the special special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols 905L, 905C, and 905R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 26, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning memory display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  Below the image display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed between a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning port. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. 27, and the specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening, and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) through the big winning opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special winning prize opening. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 26, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick gripped by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). Is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the normal symbol display 9020 performs variable display of the normal symbol such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. For example, the normal symbol display device 9020 is established based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous general symbol game has been completed. The usual game is started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is "per normal figure", the expansion and release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. On the basis of the fact that the first start condition has been established, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. In addition, the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, after the variable symbol display time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the variable symbol variable symbol display The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the special display result is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The grand prize opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize opening device that opens the grand prize opening during the execution of a round receives a game ball that falls on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the special prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 907 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Among rounds in the big hit game state, rounds in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) are normally open. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state that is controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) as the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. By doing this, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the number of executions of the round being the second round number less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 to change the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and In response to the start of any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. A period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation symbol”). Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R, etc.) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the decorative symbols are changing, or the decorative symbols are a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. Then, when the reach form of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is higher than when the reach form of normal reach appears.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 9011 side. Whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the side of the main board 9011.

  In the “sliding” variable display effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2” of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols is displayed. )) In the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R), An effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of “slip”, a predetermined number of decorative symbols are displayed after temporary display of a plurality of decorative symbols from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the display of a definite decorative symbol resulting in variable display. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is re-executed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. is there.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbols are derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed (rechanged) again in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). In this embodiment, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is excluding the first fluctuation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until all temporary decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time, “left”, “middle”, “right” The decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R indicate the number of times the decorative symbol is re-variable.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, any one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Once the decorative symbols constituting the are temporarily displayed as a predetermined display result, variable display (revariation) is performed again thereafter. The quasi-continuous chance may include a combination of decorative symbols that is a predetermined non-reach combination, instead of the variable display mode of decorative symbols. In addition, the quasi-continuous chance may include a combination of decorative symbols that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination (also simply referred to as “reach combination”) after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. For example, a decorative symbol (middle symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C among the pseudo consecutive chances is replaced with a special decorative symbol (pseudo consecutive chance symbol) that is not used in the variable display of the decorative symbol at normal time. ). Among the decorative symbols that are also used in the variable display of decorative symbols at normal times, a pseudo consecutive chance symbol that becomes a false consecutive chance by being stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C may be included. .

  In this embodiment, a re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is performed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, and the decorative design You can make the variable display appear as if it were started several times in a row. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in this embodiment, the re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is performed at most once for easy understanding. The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations may be executed more than once, for example, 2 or 3. In the variable display of “pseudo-continuous” in this embodiment, the pseudo-change that indicates whether or not re-variation is performed after the temporary stop display is performed (that is, whether or not the pseudo-continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped). Continuous production is performed. Specifically, in the pseudo-continuous production, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous chance symbols are displayed (the pseudo-continuous chances common to the successful and unsuccessful effects described later). A design is displayed), and an effect is performed to inquire whether or not the pseudo-continuous chance symbol is temporarily displayed. A mode in which the pseudo continuous chance symbol is stopped and displayed is called a success effect, and a mode in which the temporary stop display is not displayed is called a failure effect. As described above, in the “quasi-ream” variable display effect in this embodiment, since re-variation is performed once at most, re-variation is performed on the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream that is not re-variable. If the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed based on the change pattern, the failure effect is executed. Become. In addition, instead of displaying a special decorative symbol such as a pseudo-reliable chance symbol in the pseudo-continuous production, or with a special decorative symbol being stopped, each variable display by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (initial variation) In the period of (including), a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 (displayed as a common introduction effect).

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. ”In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced.

  In addition, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo continuous chances in all of the decorative symbols display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols change again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “lost”.

  Out of special symbols that become normal open round jackpot symbols as special symbols for special game, the regular jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating “3” and the probable bonus symbol such as the special symbol indicating “7” are stopped. In the case of display, a combination of multiple types of jackpots after a predetermined reach effect is executed or a reach effect is not executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being reached. Among these, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 are the determined decorative symbols that are jackpot combinations. Any one of the “8” decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Anything is acceptable.

  Whether or not to control to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit gaming state during execution of a predetermined round in the big hit gaming state after the decisive decorative symbol that becomes the big hit combination is derived and displayed (whether the probable change as a privilege is given) The promotion effect during the jackpot that is the bonus granting effect is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot promotion effect, for example, a battle effect in which characters fight in the display area of the image display device 905 may be performed. Then, it may be notified so that the player can recognize whether or not there is a promotion (a probability change as a privilege is given or not) that becomes a probability change state after the end of the big hit game state due to the victory or defeat of the main character. The jackpot promotion effect is not during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state, but the period from the start of the jackpot game state or the end of one round in the jackpot game state until the start of the next round, The game may be performed in a period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game. Further, the jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, the fact that the game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a probable change state (notifying that a privilege is granted) is notified, and the fact that the jackpot promotion success effect is not announced There is a promotion failure during jackpot (notifying that the privilege is not granted). When the big success promotion effect during the big hit is executed, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled to the probability change state. On the other hand, when the jackpot promotion promotion effect is performed, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is not controlled to the probability variation state (non-probability variation state), and is controlled to the time reduction state. In the probability variation state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative symbols is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. . Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. The short-time state is a gaming state in which the variable symbol variable display time (special-figure variation time) in the special-figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, etc., and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, initialization processing after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. Such a time-short state is when a special condition game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or when the variable display result is “big hit”, when either of the conditions is established first. finish.

  In the probabilistic state and the short time state, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each regular symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to reach a big hit gaming state than in the normal state (a gaming state advantageous to the player). The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. . Further, it is also said that the gaming state is in the high base during the high opening control period. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time-short state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and low base state. In addition, the probability variation state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a highly accurate and high base state. That is, when the jackpot promotion success effect is executed, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state, so that it is controlled to the high probability high base state. On the other hand, when the promotion success during the big hit is performed, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is not controlled to the probability variation state (non-probability variation state), and is controlled to the short-time state. It will be controlled by the state.

  The probability variation state may include not only the time variation control and the high opening control performed together with the probability variation control, but also the state where only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control and the high opening control are not performed. As an example, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “probable big hit”, the first positive change state (high high accuracy high speed control and high speed control are performed together with the positive change control) (Also called base state). After that, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the probability variation control is continuously performed, but the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed. It is also possible to control to a second certain variation state (also referred to as a high certainty low base state) that is not performed after the completion of. In addition, after the end of the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special game is “abrupt big hit” in the normal state, the state shifts to the second positive change state and only the positive change control is performed. However, the time reduction control and the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “surprise big hit” when in the probability changing state or the short time state, the state shifts to the first probability changing state, Short time control and high opening control may be performed together with the probability variation control. Alternatively, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on “probability big hit”, the control is changed to the first positive change state until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” again, while the two round big hit state based on “surprise big hit” After the completion, the process shifts to the first certain change state, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without causing the special figure display result to be “big hit”, the shift to the second certain change state is made. May be. While the short-time control and the high-open control are started and ended simultaneously (interlocked), the start and end of the probability variation control is not necessarily linked to the start and end of the short-time control and high-open control. May be.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be displayed in a stopped manner. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. After that, a fixed decorative pattern (a fixed decorative pattern serving as a chance corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). The short-term open big hit state may be controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big hit” big hit type.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  If the winning symbol is opened after the final decorative symbol composing the opening chance is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accurate” There is a case where it is controlled to a short hit big hit state based on that, and a case where it is controlled to a small hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, the winning winning opening is opened after the definite decorative symbols constituting the reach combination are derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbols. The variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “exact” Only when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state. Therefore, the confirmed decorative symbols that make up the opening chances correspond to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit gaming state, while the fixed decorative symbols of the reach combination are short-term open big hit states It corresponds to being controlled by.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 shown in FIG. 27 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 9011 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 9012 provides effects such as display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 909 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 909 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the main board 9011 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. Note that the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. Further, on the main board 9011, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display device 9020, a first hold display device 9025A, a second hold display device 9025B, and a general drawing hold display device 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 905, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 90103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  The random number circuit 90104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of various random numbers used to control the progress of the game. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example, and periodically or irregularly updates various numerical data by software, so that a part of various random values can be obtained. You may make it count the numerical data which show. Software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with a table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 28 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a reach reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a reach effect of super reach is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The super reach variation pattern has a reach effect such as super reach A and super reach B regardless of whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”. In the example shown in the figure, an example is shown in which a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed in a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or the variable display result is “lost”. However, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may also be performed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” or when the variable display result is “small hit”. Moreover, although the variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed is an example of a super reach variation pattern, it may be a normal reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern. Similarly, for the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo ream, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, there may be normal reach or non-reach. Also good. Further, as described above, the example shown in the figure shows an example in which the quasi-continuous variation is a maximum of one time, but there is a variation pattern that can be executed more than once, for example, two times three times. May be. In addition, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” may be performed in the other variation patterns shown in the figure.

  The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 27 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 90102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. Such a RAM 90102 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 includes an I / O 90105 for inputting various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100 and for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port.

  As shown in FIG. 27, an effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, an ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and an effect control CPU 90120 work area. Random number for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and the CPU 90120 for effect control A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the presentation control CPU 90120 is an I / O. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 through O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, A wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 9035A, and a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 9035B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, the random number circuit 90124 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 27 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 controls effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. Consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in decorative symbol variable display operations, reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols Has been. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Among the special-fluctuation effect production control patterns, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern (special-figure change effect control pattern) based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started. The effect control CPU 90120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when execution of a predetermined effect such as a notice effect is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the audio control board 9013, and the like. In the display control unit 90123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 9013 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. . After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control.

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  CPU90103 which performed such game control main processing will perform the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 29, if the interruption request signal from CTC is received and an interruption request | requirement is received. When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count are performed via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (step S9013).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 'to MR3' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9014). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9015). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform operation control and open / close operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S9016). The CPU 90103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 90103 transmits the control command from the main board 9011 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (step S9017). As an example, in the command control processing, the output control board 9012 among the output ports included in the I / O 90105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process performed in step S9015 of FIG. In the special symbol process shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90101 of FIG. 30 as the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 90103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A. It is determined whether the start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201). At this time, if the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number, which is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S90202). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to “1” (step S90203).

  When the first start-up switch 9022A is OFF in step S9021 (step S90201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; Yes), normal It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 906B ( Step S90204). At this time, if the second start port switch 9022B is ON (step S90204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S90205). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to “2” (step S90206).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90203 and S90206, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value that is the stored value of the start port buffer is updated by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90208). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the RAM 90102, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S90208, the CPU 90103, among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 90104 and the RAM 90102, the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random value for determining the jackpot type Numerical data indicating MR2 ′ is extracted (step S90209). The random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result indicates whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, and whether the variable display result is “small hit”. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the winning gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example. For the jackpot type determination random number MR2 ′, the jackpot type which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “0” to “99”. The CPU 90103 executes numerical value data indicating a part or all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol by executing the process of step S90209. Extract. In this embodiment, the random value MR1 ′ and the random value MR2 ′ are extracted in the process of step S90209. However, as described above, the random value MR2 ′ is used to determine the jackpot type. Since it is a random value, it may be extracted only when the determination result of the random value MR1 ′ is “big hit”. In this case, the random value MR2 'may be extracted after it is determined Yes in step S90241 in FIG.

  The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ and MR2 ′ is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A as shown in FIG. When the mouth buffer value is “2”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ and MR2 ′ is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B as shown in FIG.

  The first special figure storage unit 90151A shown in FIG. 32A generates a start prize (first start prize) when the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the normal prize ball device 906A. However, the hold data of the special figure game that has been started but has not yet been started (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 90103 extracts the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, which are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, etc. Until the upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure storage unit 90151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  In the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B shown in FIG. 32 (B), the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the start winning (second start winning) is made. The pending data of the special figure game that has been generated but has not yet started (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B associates the holding number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, numerical data indicating the special figure display result determining random number value MR1 ′ or the jackpot type determining random number value MR2 ′ extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 is set as reserved data, and the number is predetermined. Store until the upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 90151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  Subsequent to the process of step S90210 shown in FIG. 31, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S90211). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. To transmit a first start opening prize designation command for notifying 9012 that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is established. Set up. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The second special symbol display device 904B performs a setting for transmitting a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established. . The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process is completed, for example.

  Thereafter, for example, the storage address of the reserved memory count notification command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc. Is set to transmit either the first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number (step S90212). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  After executing the process of step S90212, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90213). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S90213; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90214), and then step S90204. Proceed to the process. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S90213; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90215). The start winning determination process is terminated. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B detect a valid start winning of a game ball at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be surely completed.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 in FIG. 30, the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102.

  The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 90151A and the second special symbol storage unit 90151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 904B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special symbol display result. The variable display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Processing for determining one of a plurality of patterns is included. The random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. It takes a value in the range of “251”. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol variable display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal processing in step S90110 and the variation pattern setting processing in step S90111, a fixed special symbol, a special symbol, and a variation pattern including a variable symbol display time that is a variable symbol display result are determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the special symbol random number MR1 ′ for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern. And a process for determining a variable display mode of the decorative design.

  The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation processing includes processing for performing settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol has started variation. It includes processing to measure For example, each time the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed, the first special symbol display device subtracts 1 or adds 1 to the special symbol variation timer value that is a stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the RAM 90102. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in 904A or a special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 904B, the elapsed time is measured by a common timer. Done. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S90112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A, or in the second special symbol display device 904B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. In addition, the special symbol stop process in step S90113 includes a process for determining whether or not the time-short state is ended, and for setting to transmit a command to notify the effect control board 9012 when it is ended. (The command itself is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 in the command control process described above).

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, in response to the big hit type of “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds” and the upper prize is set to the upper limit number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time since the big winning opening is in an open state, a measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. . In addition, the big hit release process in step S90115 includes a process of setting to send a prize ball command indicating that to the side of the effect control board 9012 when a game ball is detected by the count switch 9023. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 in the command control process described above).

  The big hit release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909 is executed. Includes processing to wait until the time has elapsed, and processing to perform various settings (start setting for probability variation state and time reduction state) to start probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of jackpot gaming state Yes. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hitting end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag or the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S90110 of FIG. 30 as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S90231). The second special figure holding memory number is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, in the process of step S90231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 90102 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; No), the second special figure storage unit 90151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S90232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9022, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, and the second special figure reserved memory is updated. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 90151B is higher by one entry. (Step S90233). Further, in the process of step S90233, the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter in the RAM 90102 may be updated by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S90235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. For example, in the processing of step S90235, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter is read from the RAM 90102, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  Note that the special game using the second special figure is not limited to a game executed with priority over the special graphic game using the first special figure. The execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be determined.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; No), the first special figure storage unit 90151A stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S90236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Following the processing of step S90236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. In the unit 90151A, the hold data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ and MR2 ′ stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are placed one entry higher. Shift is performed (step S90237). In the process of step S90237, the RAM 90102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S90238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S90234 and S90238, the special chart display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is used as a use table for determining whether to be “big hit” or “losing”. A special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S90239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 90130A shown in FIG. 34A is set in the usage table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 90130B shown in FIG. 34B is set in the usage table. Further, the CPU 90103 may select special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state.

  The first special figure display result determination table 90130A displays the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state with the variable display result as “small hit” based on the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result This table is referred to for determination. The second special figure display result determination table 90130B displays the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state with the variable display result as “small hit” based on the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result This table is referred to for determination.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a special figure display is made depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the special figure display result determination table A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 ′ is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “ It is data for determination assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state as “big hit”. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). If the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in a probabilistic state, compared to when it is in a normal state or a short time state. Thus, the determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “30000” to “30350”) are assigned to the special figure display results of “small hits”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied, The case where the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is established. The ratio determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state as “small hit” can be varied.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit game state is controlled. In a gaming state where a game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B, such as a state (highly accurate high base state), frequent occurrence of a small hit gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to an extended game. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A are assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. Also good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a smaller determination value than the first special figure display result determination table 90130A may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. In this way, when the high base state such as the short-time state or the probability change state is set, the proportion determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state may be lower than when the low base state such as the normal state or the short-time probability change state is used. Good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90239 shown in FIG. 33, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is stored as “big hit”, “small hit”, “lost”. By comparing with the determined value assigned to each special figure display result, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” (step S90240).

  Since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state is selected in step S90239, in the process of step S90240, the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a certain change state. Whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of a special figure game or the like is started is a normal state or a short time state, the game state is indicated in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A or the second special figure display result determination table 90130B. The table data corresponding to the normal state or the short time state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 ′ is determined with reference to this table data. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a certain change state, the game state is determined in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A or the second special figure display result determination table 90130B. The table data corresponding to the probability variation state is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 ′ is determined with reference to the table data.

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S90240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S90241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S90241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to an ON state (step S90242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 35 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S90243).

  The jackpot type determination table 90131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled in the jackpot game state. This is a table that is referred to. In the big hit type determination table 90131, the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A) or the second special symbol (second Depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 904B, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”, etc. It is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 90131, the assignment of the decision value to the big hit type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, the predetermined value (the value in the range of “82” to “99”) is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation special figure Is the second special figure, no decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the short-open big hit state is controlled. In a gaming state where a game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by 906B, frequent occurrence of a short-term open big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in game interest due to a prolonged game can be prevented. .

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of determination values different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  By referring to the jackpot type determination table 90131 set in step S90243 shown in FIG. 33, numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 ′ stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is changed to “non-probable change”, Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type of “probability change” and “surprise probability” is matched, it is determined which jackpot type is a plurality of types (step S90244).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S90244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is any of the short-time state and the probable state that is more advantageous to the player than the short-time state. It is determined before the fixed special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (step S90245), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S90241 that it is not “big hit” (step S90241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S90246). When it is determined that the “small hit” is determined (step S90246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to an ON state (step S90247).

  If it is determined in step S90246 that it is not “small hit” (step S90246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S90245 and S90247, whether to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state? A predetermined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination of whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state (step S90248). As an example, if it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, the result is a lost pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S90241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, “3”, “5”, “7”, which are big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S90244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variable big hit symbol among the normal open round big hit symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is a short-term open big hit symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S90248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S90235, if the number of reserved games stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S90235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S90250), the special symbol is displayed. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 is effected from the main board 9011. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 9012 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90111 of FIG. 30 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the big hit flag is on (step S90261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. Set (step S90262). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the RAM 90102, it is specified whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S90263).

  When the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A is determined (predetermined) to set the special figure display result to “big hit”, the variation pattern is converted into a random number MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A, a numerical value (3) to be compared with the random number MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern, depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprising change”. Determined value) is a variation pattern PA4′-1, a variation pattern PB4′-1, a variation pattern PB4′-2, a variation pattern PB5′-1 to a variation pattern PB5′-4, and a variation pattern PC1′-1 to a variation pattern. Assigned to one of PC1'-2.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern varies depending on which of the plurality of types of big hit types is determined. . For example, the variation pattern PA4′-1, the variation pattern PB4′-1, the variation pattern PB4′-2, and the variation pattern PB5′-1 depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable variation” or “probability variation”. Assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern PB5′-4 is different. Thereby, the ratio determined by the same variation pattern can be varied according to the determination result of whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which determined values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on which of a plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the fluctuation pattern PA4′-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4′-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4′-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB5′-1 to the fluctuation pattern PB5. While the decision value is assigned to '-4, the decision value is not assigned to the variation pattern PC1'-1 to the variation pattern PC1'-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprising”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern PC1′-1 to variation pattern PC1′-2, while the variation pattern PA4′-1, No determined value is assigned to the variation pattern PB4′-1, the variation pattern PB4′-2, and the variation pattern PB5′-1 to the variation pattern PB5′-4. Thus, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the short-term open big hit state according to “surprise”, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be different from the case where the normal open big hit state is controlled. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined by the same fluctuation | variation pattern can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a probable variation state, or a short-time state when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability variation”, “probability variation”, or “surprise variation” Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation patterns. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation patterns depending on which of the plurality of game states. In this embodiment, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, more decision values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA4′-1 indicating the normal reach fluctuation pattern than in the case of “probability change”. Yes. Therefore, when the reach effect of super reach is executed, the possibility that the jackpot type will be “probability change” is higher than “non-probability change”, so that the player can be expected and Interest can be improved. Further, in the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 37A, more determination values are assigned to the variation pattern that performs the reach effect of the super reach B than the variation pattern that performs the reach effect of the super reach A. ing.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S90261 shown in FIG. 36 (step S90261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S90264). If the small hit flag is on (step S90264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B shown in FIG. To set (step S90265).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S90264 (step S90264; No), a loss variation pattern determination table 90132C shown in FIG. 37C is used as a use table for determining any of the variation patterns. Select and set (step S90267). For example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 90102 is turned on, it is specified whether or not the time reduction control in which the time reduction control is performed in the gaming state is the probability change state or the time reduction state (step S90268). ).

  The loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special figure display result is “lost”, the variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination. It is a table that is referred to to determine either.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, the determined values are changed so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern varies depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time variation control is being performed in the probability variation state or the short time state. There is a part assigned to the pattern. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern can be varied depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time-varying control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time-short state. In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, there are portions in which determination values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time variation control is being performed in the probability variation state or the short time state. As a result, different variation patterns can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time-varying control or the time-shortening control in the time-shortening state. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C is more determined than the determination value assigned to the variation pattern for performing the reach of super reach, in contrast to the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A of FIG. A value is assigned to a non-reach variation pattern. Therefore, when the reach effect of super reach is executed, the expectation level that is a big hit is high. Also, in the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, in contrast to the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A in FIG. 37A, the variation in which the reach effect of the super reach B is performed rather than the variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach A is performed. The decision values are assigned so that there are fewer patterns. Therefore, the super reach B has a higher expectation level that is a big hit when the reach effect is executed than the super reach A. Therefore, the player's attention can be attracted to the type of reach performance to be executed, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  After executing any of the processing of steps S90263, S90265, and S90268 shown in FIG. By referring to the variation pattern determination table set in the table, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90269). Here, in the process of step S90269, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the establishment of the first start condition. Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 904B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, Using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern that is updated by a common random counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module.

  When the big hit flag is on, the table data corresponding to the big hit type identified by the processing of step S90263 is selected from the table data constituting the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 90132A, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is selected. It is only necessary to be able to determine a variation pattern to which a determination value corresponding to numerical data indicating 'is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of setting the special figure display result to “big hit”.

  When the small hit flag is on, it is only necessary to refer to the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B and determine a variation pattern to which a determination value corresponding to numerical data indicating the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine the variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of setting the special figure display result to “small hit”.

  When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, by determining the variation pattern in the process of step S90269, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. That is, the process of step S90269 includes a process of determining whether or not to change the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “losing”.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S90269, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S90270). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is.

  After executing the process of step S90270, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings for starting the change of the special symbol are performed so as to start any of the special game using the figure (step S90271). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S90271, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the change of the special symbol (step S90272). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 performs a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A transmission provided in the RAM 90102 for setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 90101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance in order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first pending storage number notification command. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 sends a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

  Here, the first change start command is a command for designating the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. The second variation start command is a command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 in response to variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. The gaming state designation command is a command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Based on the command transmission setting in step S90272, each time a predetermined command control process is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, the first The variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. The game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step S90273), and then the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S90113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not a special figure confirmation display flag provided in, for example, the RAM 90102 is on (step S90291). Here, the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S90295 described later, corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game is derived and displayed.

  If the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S90291 (step S90291; No), settings for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol are performed (step S90292). At this time, a setting for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90293). Also, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S90294). For example, in the process of step S90294, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 90102. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state (step S90295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S90292, the special symbol process processing corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol fixed display time set in step S90294 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S90291 that the special figure confirmation display flag is on.

  If the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S90291 (step S90291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S90296). For example, in the process of step S90296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S90294 is read, and whether or not the timer value becomes “0”. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. That's fine. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S90297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S90298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S90298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a big hit start production waiting time (step S90299). Also, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90300). For example, in the process of step S90300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S90301). In addition, settings for ending the probability change state and the time reduction state are performed (step S90302). For example, as processing of step S90302, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-short flag to turn it off, processing for clearing the time-count counter for counting the remaining number of special game executed in the high base, etc. May be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S90303), and then the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S90298 (step S90298; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S90304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S90304; Yes), a predetermined time is set in advance as a small hit start production waiting time (step S90305). Subsequently, a setting is made to transmit a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result being “small hit” from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S90307). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S90308).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S90304 (step S90304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S90309). After executing one of the processes in steps S90308 and S90309, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening control or the high opening control in the high base is to be ended (step S90311). Yes), the time reduction control, the high opening control, and the like are ended, and a setting for transmitting a time reduction end command indicating the end of the time reduction state is performed (step S90312), and the special symbol stop process is ended. On the other hand, when not ending (step S90311; No), the special symbol stop process is ended as it is. For example, in the process of step S90311, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction count counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control or the high release control in the high base may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the special symbol stop process may be ended. It should be noted that even when the gaming state is the probability change state, if the time reduction flag is on, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is to be ended, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result of the end. Thus, while the time-shortening control is ended, the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of special game is executed. As a result, the gaming state can be changed to the latent probability. For the probability change state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability change flag is on, time reduction control is continuously performed until the next variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the process of step S90311, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability variation control end is extracted from a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, and a probability variation control end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90101 or the like is referred to. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is to be terminated, for example, when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control has reached a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S90311, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 90120 shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9072; No), the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 among the input ports included in the I / O 90125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9073), and command analysis processing is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S9074, it is determined whether or not an abnormal command is received from the main substrate 9011 side (step S9075). The abnormal command is related to winning such as, for example, pretending that the player has won a prize even though he has not actually won a prize (more specifically, a winning to a variable winning device which is not actually opened). This command is transmitted when at least one of a plurality of abnormalities such as an abnormality (winning abnormality) or an abnormality (dish abnormality) caused by the upper and lower plates being filled with game balls is detected. As the abnormal command, a command corresponding to each of a plurality of abnormalities is transmitted from the main board 9011 side. If it is determined that an abnormal command has been received (step S9075; Yes), an abnormality notification process for notifying the player that an abnormality has occurred is executed (step S9076). In the abnormality notification process, for example, a message indicating which type of abnormality has occurred on the image display device, a lamp lighting, or a sound output process may be performed. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the abnormality notification can be executed at any timing by receiving the abnormality command by the process of step S9076, and an icon as a special display is displayed. It is possible to notify the abnormality even within a predetermined period after the notification is made.

  After performing the process of step S9076, or when it is determined in step S9075 that an abnormal command has not been received (step S9075; No), it is determined whether or not an effect setting has been made by the player (step S9077). . In the process of step S9077, for example, it is determined by checking whether or not an effect setting button (not shown) has been operated by the player, by detecting whether or not a sensor that detects the player's operation is detected. When it is determined that the effect setting has been performed (step S9077; Yes), an effect setting process is performed (step S9078). In the process of step S9078, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the type of the music and background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 905, and the game effect lamp, when the effect setting button is operated by the player. Settings relating to effects such as brightness settings of various lamps such as 909 may be changed. In addition, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting is to be changed from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed according to a change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do it. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the setting of the effect can be executed at any timing by the player's operation by the processing of step S9078, and the special display Settings relating to the effects can be made even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed. Specifically, the process of step S9078 can be executed at any timing such as during demonstration display, during variable display, or during control of a big hit game. Note that the process of step S9078 may not be performed during a period (for example, 0.1 second) from the end of variable display to the start of the next variable display. Specifically, the process in step S9078 may be prohibited during a period from the reception of the symbol determination command to the reception of the change start command.

  After performing the process of step S9078 or when it is determined in step S9077 that the effect setting has not been performed (step S9077; No), the effect control process process is executed (step S9079). In the effect control process of step S9079, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, a sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 9011 are performed.

  Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S9080), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter in the RAM 90122 is obtained by software as various random values used for effect control. Update. Thereafter, the process returns to step S9072.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process performed in step S9079 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes one of the following processes in steps S90170 to S90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122, for example. To do.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 905 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 9011 is received. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 905. In order to perform variable display execution settings and other various effects, it includes a process for determining a definite decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result. . In addition, in the variable display start setting process, an advantageous state such as a special display effect execution setting in which a special image such as an icon as a special display is displayed step by step, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, etc. Execution setting of the notice effect as an effect suggesting that the control is performed is performed. It should be noted that the degree of advantage for the player is, for example, a state that is actually advantageous for the player when a certain event occurs (a state where a privilege is granted or granted, or a state where the rate of privilege grant is high) , An advantageous state that is different from a privilege), or a proportion of an advantageous state. Further, the privilege indicated that the possibility of granting is high due to the special mode may be the same as the target of the advantage for the player (advantageous state), and is different from the target of the advantage for the player. It may be a thing. In addition, the special display effect in this embodiment indicates that a special image such as an icon as a special display is displayed stepwise according to the degree of advantage. For example, the special display is a variable display. Display (active display) or meter display corresponding to the display, and various types of effects such as those that change the display mode of the active display step by step, and those that increase the meter display step by step It may be. That is, the concept of stepwise change of special display includes that a special image such as an icon is displayed stepwise, the mode of active display changes stepwise, and meter display increases (or decreases). For example.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 90120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 90122, and performs various operations during variable display of the decorative design. The production control is performed. In the variable display effect processing, a special display effect or a notice effect is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Corresponding to the above, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is displayed. Even if it does not depend on the effect control command from the main board 9011, the determined decorative design can be derived and displayed autonomously on the effect control board 9012 side, and the variable display result can be determined. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special chart waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received. When the hit start specifying command is received and the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit effect processing. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”. In addition, the waiting process per special figure in step S90173 includes a process of performing execution setting of the above-mentioned jackpot promotion effect when the hitting start designation command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state except “surprise”. ing.

  The small hitting effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or by outputting a sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, or a game effect lamp 909 by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED is executed. Also, in the small hitting effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or by outputting a sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, or a game effect lamp 909 by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls are executed at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, and a game effect lamp 909 or decoration is output by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the LED for the game is executed. Further, in the big hit effect processing, control for executing the big hit promotion effect and the notification effect is performed. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process in step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S90171 of FIG. 40 as variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S90551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S90551; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, the designated variation pattern is obtained. Is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S90552).

  If it is determined in step S90552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; Yes), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a non-reach combination is determined (step S90553). As an example, in the process of step S90553, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined left determined in advance stored in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determining table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. As a result, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined from the determined decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined.

  If it is determined in step S90552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S90554). As an example, in the process of step S90554, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and predetermined left and right determined in advance stored in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the symbol determination table, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 are the same among the confirmed ornament symbols. Determine the decorative pattern. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, and referring to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121, etc. Then, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, for example, in the case where the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S90551 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S90551; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or “surprise” (step S90555). ). When it is determined that the position is “small hit” or “accuracy” (step S90555; Yes), for example, a chance to open the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “small hit” or “accuracy”. A combination is determined (step S90557). As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, a final stop symbol constituting any one of a plurality of types of opening chances and The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for chance determination that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined chance determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thus, it is only necessary to determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes.

  When it is determined in step S525 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “small hit” (step S90555; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S90556). As an example, in the process of step S90556, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the big hit determination symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the RAM 90122 is extracted, and then a predetermined big hit determination symbol stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the determination table, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the screen of the image display device 905 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern.

  As a specific example, regardless of whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, in the process of step S90556, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability change symbols is selected. What is necessary is just to select and to determine the definite ornament symbol which comprises a jackpot combination.

  After executing any of the processes of step S90553, step S90554, step S90556, and step S90557, the effect control CPU 90120 sets execution of a special display effect in which special images such as icons are displayed in stages according to the degree of advantage. A special display effect execution setting process is performed for performing (Step S90559).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special display effect execution setting process performed in step S90559 of FIG. In the special display effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the special display effect (step S90601). Specifically, in the process of step S90601, whether or not to execute the special display effect is determined with reference to the special display effect execution determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the special display effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the special display effect is set to the determination ratio illustrated in accordance with the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set so that the ratio in which the variable display result is “big hit” is higher in the case of executing the special display effect than in the case of not executing the special display effect. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the special display effect is executed. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio differs depending on whether it is a super reach big hit or a normal reach big hit. When the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination rate may be further varied according to the variation pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 42, after executing the processing of step S90601, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the special display effect in step S90601 (step S90602). When it is determined not to execute the special display effect (step S90602; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the special display effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the special display effect (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution mode of the special display effect (step S90603). Specifically, in the process of step S90603, the execution mode of the special display effect is determined as one of a plurality of modes with reference to the special display effect execution mode determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the special display effect execution mode determination table. In this embodiment, in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the types of special display effects such as “pattern A”, “pattern B”, and “pattern C” are set, and variable display results are displayed. Accordingly, the determination ratio is set as shown. Specifically, the “pattern A” mode is a mode in which a star-shaped icon is displayed, and the “pattern B” mode is a mode in which a star-shaped icon and a triangular icon are displayed. The mode “C” is a mode in which a star icon, a triangle icon, and a round icon are displayed. In the special display effect execution mode determination table in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the “pattern B” mode is more preferable than the “pattern B” mode than the “pattern B” mode. The determination ratio is set so that the ratio that the variable display result becomes “big hit” when executed is higher (that is, the percentage that “big hit” is displayed when more icons are displayed) Is set to be high). Therefore, the development destination of the production differs depending on which icon is displayed, and it is possible to attract the player's attention to which icon is displayed. In the illustrated example, three types of patterns “Pattern A” to “Pattern C” are shown. However, there may be a mode in which only a triangular icon is displayed or a mode in which only a round icon is displayed. Good. Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of executions of the special display effect is 1 (only the presence or absence of execution is determined in step S90601 in FIG. 42), but the special display effect is executed a plurality of times. (The higher the number of executions, the higher the ratio of “big hit” may be.) In that case, one type of icon may be displayed each time it is executed (FIG. 42). The number of executions is also determined in step S90601, and the variation pattern and the mode corresponding to the number of times may be determined in the process of step S90603). Furthermore, even if the number of icons to be displayed is the same, the ratio of “big hit” may be different depending on the combination of icons to be displayed (that is, the icons to be displayed according to the variable display result). Combinations may be determined at different rates).

  Returning to FIG. 42, after executing the processing of step S90603, the CPU 90120 for effect control does not perform the pseudo-continuous variation, but performs the pseudo-continuous variation pattern (PB3′-1, PB3 shown in FIG. 28). It is determined by confirming the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 side (step S90604). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern (step S90604; No), that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous fluctuation or is not a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern, an execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 1, the execution timing of the special display effect is determined (step S90605), and the special display effect execution setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation (step S90604; Yes), the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 44B (step S90606). Then, the special display effect execution setting process ends. As described above, in this embodiment, for ease of understanding, a maximum of one quasi-continuous variation is performed (one re-variation). The number of times of pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be executed more than once, for example, 2 times or 3 times. In this case, in step S90604 in FIG. If it is determined whether or not the effect is performed and the failure effect is executed, the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the special display effect. Good (the execution timing may be determined with reference to an execution timing determination table in which the superimposition timing cannot be selected).

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table referred to for determining the execution timing of the special display effect. FIG. 44A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table 1 that is referred to when the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern or not a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern. FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of an execution timing determination table 2 that is referred to in the case of a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern. In the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 44A, three types of timings “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set as the determination timing, and are set to the illustrated determination ratio. Note that “timing 1” to “timing 3” illustrated in FIG. 44A are execution timings set in advance according to the variation pattern. For example, even when the execution timing is the same “timing 2”, the timing varies. The timing is different for each pattern. All the execution timings of “timing 1” to “timing 3” may be different timings according to the variation pattern. For example, the execution timing of “timing 1” may be a common execution timing regardless of the variation pattern. Good. On the other hand, in the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 44 (B), two types of timings “timing 1” and “timing 3” are set as the determination timings, and are set to the illustrated determination ratios. . As will be described in detail later, the execution timing of “timing 2” is set to an execution timing in which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed, and other “timing 1” and “ The execution timing of “timing 3” is set to an execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap (see FIG. 46). In the illustrated example, three types of timings “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in each of the execution timing determination tables. .

  Here, the special display effect and its execution timing will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing details of the special display effect. As shown in FIG. 45, when the special display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect (see FIGS. 52B to 52E) that suggests whether or not to display an icon as a special display. When the result of the predetermined effect indicates success, the special effect is special. The special display change notification for notifying that the icon as the display is displayed is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S90603 of FIG. (Special display changes). Then, the special display effect ends. In this embodiment, the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the special display is changed. However, the special display change notification is continuously performed for the predetermined period of 10 seconds described above. For example, it may be performed continuously for 6 seconds, and the special display change notification may not be performed for the remaining 4 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the execution of the failure effect or the notice effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, but the special display change notification is continuously executed during the predetermined period. For example, it may be a period of production or a period counted by a timer such as 10 seconds. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 45 shows a case where the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success (in this embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, the effect result of the predetermined effect always indicates success). However, there may be a case where the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates failure, and in that case, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed), and the special display effect is finished as it is. Good. The process of step S90601 in FIG. 42 determines whether or not to execute such a special display effect. In addition, in the case where the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates failure, it is only necessary to select a mode for executing the predetermined effect indicating failure in the process of step S90603 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the special display effect. FIG. 46A shows the execution timing of the special display effect in the case of the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, and FIG. 46B shows the case of the variation pattern other than the pseudo-continuous variation. The execution timing of the special display effect at the time of the variation pattern to be performed is shown. FIG. 46C shows the case of a variation pattern other than the pseudo-continuous pattern, and specifically shows the execution timing of the special display effect when the variation pattern is a non-reach loss pattern. In the illustrated example, the variation pattern of non-reach loss is shown, and the illustration of other variation patterns is omitted. However, in the case of other variation patterns, as described above, “ Timing 1 ”to“ timing 3 ”are set in advance. As shown in FIG. 46 (A), in the case of the pseudo-continuous change pattern, the pseudo-continuous effect to be executed is a failure effect. As described above, in the special display effect, after a result indicating success as the effect result of the predetermined effect is displayed, the special display change notification for notifying that the icon as the special display is displayed is continuously performed for a predetermined period. It is suggested that it is advantageous for the player. Nevertheless, if a failure production is subsequently performed as a pseudo-continuous production, the player will be discouraged and the gaming interest will be reduced. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the case of the pseudo-continuous change pattern, the execution of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed as the execution timing of the special display effect. Timing cannot be selected. Therefore, in the process of step S90606 in FIG. 42, the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. doing. As a result, the execution of the failure effect is restricted during a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed, and the deterioration of the game entertainment is prevented. In addition, when determining the execution timing when the special display effect is executed a plurality of times with the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-continuous pattern, a plurality of timings are selected from the execution timings other than “timing 2” in the process of step S90606 in FIG. do it. Further, when the result of the predetermined effect in the special display effect indicates failure, the above situation does not occur, and therefore the execution timing of “timing 2” may be selectable (FIG. 46B described later). the same as). On the other hand, even if the performance result of the predetermined effect in the special display effect indicates a failure, the execution timing of “timing 2” cannot be selected and it is informed that the icon is not displayed (the predetermined effect as a mini game) It may be possible to prevent the failure effect from being performed during a predetermined period of time after the result of (1) is unsuccessful. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the result of the predetermined effect ends in failure and the failure effect is further executed. Further, in this embodiment, it is informed that the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-continuous effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the special display effect overlap cannot be selected, and the icon as the special display is displayed. Although the example of prohibiting the execution of the failure effect during the predetermined period after the display is shown, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-continuous effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed may be selectable. In that case, the failure effect may be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as a smaller display than normal, or a transparent display. In addition, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-continuous effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the special display effect overlap is not made unselectable, and is determined to be, for example, a determination ratio of 1% or 2%. You may restrict | limit a ratio by making it extremely low compared with the case where failure production is not performed. That is, the restriction of execution of the failure effect includes not only the case where it is not executed, but also the case where it is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, or the case where it is executed at an extremely low rate. In addition, when the execution timing of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-continuous effect and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed can be selected, and “timing 2” is determined, “timing 2” and “ By performing a process of shifting the execution timing of the special display effect at a timing such as “timing 2.5” which is an execution timing between “timing 3”, it is simulated after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed. You may restrict | limit that a failure production is performed as a continuous production.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), when the execution timing of the special display effect is determined as “timing 1”, the failure effect is subsequently performed as a pseudo-joint effect after a certain period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated to some extent. However, in order to prevent the player from becoming more discouraged, in the case of the pseudo-continuous change pattern, “timing 1” and “timing 2” cannot be selected, that is, before the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect. The set timing may not be selectable (the failure effect is also limited during the period after the icon as the special display is displayed). According to this, since the execution of the failure effect is restricted after it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed, it is possible to further prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating. While “timing 2” cannot be selected, the determination ratio determined as “timing 1” may be an extremely low determination ratio such as 1% or 2%.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46B, in the case of a variation pattern that performs pseudo continuous variation, the pseudo continuous effect is a successful effect. Therefore, after the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period and it is suggested that it is advantageous for the player, the event that the player is discouraged by executing the failure effect does not occur. For this reason, as shown in the drawing, the execution timing of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed can be selected as the execution timing of the special display effect. That is, in the process of step S90605 of FIG. 42, the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 44A including the execution timing of “timing 2”. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 46C, the processing in step S90605 of FIG. 42 includes the execution timing of “timing 2” as shown in FIG. Although the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1, the execution timing of “timing 1” is compared with the case of the variation pattern that performs the pseudo continuous variation shown in FIG. However, the execution timings of “timing 2” and “timing 3” are different, although the timing is the same (for example, the timing 2 seconds after the start of variable display). In this way, by providing an execution timing different from the common execution timing in accordance with the variation pattern, it is possible to enhance the effect. Note that, as shown in FIG. 46C, the special display effect can be executed even with a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation and a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous variation. According to this, since the pseudo-joint effect is not executed in the predetermined period after it is informed that the icon as the special display is displayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment. When the execution timing is determined when the special display effect is executed a plurality of times with a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation (with a variation pattern other than the pseudo-continuous variation), in the process of step S90605 in FIG. A plurality of timings may be selected from all execution timings from “timing 3”. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B (the same applies to the case where the variation pattern is a reach instead of the pseudo-variation variation pattern), the execution timing of the special display effect is the timing before the reach. A special display effect may be executed. Note that the pseudo continuous variation may be one or more times, and one special display effect may be performed for each variation including the first variation, or in one variation including the first variation. Multiple special display effects may be performed. Further, when a special display effect is performed a plurality of times, icons displayed in stages are increased (for example, when a total of three special display effects are performed, one icon is displayed in one special display effect. Display, and finally three icons are displayed).

  Returning to FIG. 41, after executing the special display effect execution setting process in step S90559, the effect control CPU 90120 provides a notice such as a cut-in notice or a step-up notice for notifying whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. A notice effect execution setting process for effect execution setting is performed (step S90560).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect execution setting process performed in step S90560 of FIG. In the notice effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the notice effect is executed (step S90901). Specifically, in the process of step S90901, the presence / absence of the notice effect is determined with reference to the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation and facilitate understanding, the cut-in notice is executed as the notice effect. However, other kinds of notice effects may be executed, It is assumed that different types of notice effects may be executed according to the variable display result.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a notice effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the notice effect is set to the determination ratio illustrated in accordance with the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set so that the ratio in which the variable display result is “big hit” is higher in the case where the notice effect is executed than in the case where the notice effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to collect the player's attention as to whether or not the notice effect is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 47, after performing the process of step S90901, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the notice effect in step S90901 (step S90902). When it is determined not to execute the notice effect (step S90902; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the notice effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the notice effect (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the special display effect execution setting has been made in the special display effect execution setting process in step S90560 of FIG. (Step S90904). When it is determined that the execution setting for the special display effect is not made (step S90904; No), the execution timing of the notice effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. The setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution setting for the special display effect has been made (step S90904; Yes), any one of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIGS. Is determined according to the execution timing of the special display effect, and the execution timing of the notice effect is determined. Then, the notice effect execution setting process ends.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an execution timing determination table referred to for determining the execution timing of the notice effect. FIG. 49A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table A that is referred to when the special display effect is not executed. In the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. 49A, four types of timings “timing A” to “timing D” are set, and are set to the illustrated determination ratio. 49 (B) to 49 (D) show configuration examples of an execution timing determination table B to an execution timing determination table D that are referred to when a special display effect is executed. Specifically, the execution timing determination table B is a table that is referred to when the special display effect is executed at the timing “timing 1”, and the execution timing determination table C has the special display effect “timing 2”. The execution timing determination table D is a table that is referred to when the special display effect is executed at the timing “timing 3”. In the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D, the execution timing of the notice effect is set so that the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed cannot be selected (FIG. 50). reference). In the illustrated example, four types of timings “timing A” to “timing D” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in each of the execution timing determination tables. . In the illustrated example, the execution timing is determined regardless of the variable display result. For example, the variable display is performed so that the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the execution timing is delayed. The execution timing determined according to the result may be different (in contrast, the earlier the execution timing, the higher the ratio of “big hit” may be). According to this, a player's attention can be gathered also about the timing at which a notice effect is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 49, an example is shown in which the respective tables of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D are prepared in advance according to the execution timing of the special display effect. 47 is created in the process of step S90906 in FIG. 47, and the execution timing is determined from the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. It may be. According to this, the capacity can be reduced.

  Subsequently, the execution timing of the special display effect and the notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed. In the case where the special display effect is not executed, any execution timing may be determined from all the execution timings “timing A” to “timing D” illustrated (see FIG. 49A). Further, the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 50 shows an example in the case where an error occurs at the timing or the effect setting is performed by the player, and description thereof is omitted here. Note that the case where an error occurs at the timing of “X” and the case where the player makes an effect setting will be described later. Further, as described above, even when the special display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed). ) Since the special display effect is finished as it is, the execution timing of the notice effect may be determined from any of the execution timings “timing A” to “timing D”.

  Specifically, FIG. 50A is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed at “timing 1” in FIG. 44 (see FIG. 46). As shown in the drawing, when the special display effect is executed at “timing 1”, any timing from “timing B” to “timing D” other than “timing A” is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect (“ Timing A "cannot be selected). That is, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the execution timing of the notice effect with reference to the execution timing determination table B shown in FIG. 49B in the process of step S90906 of FIG. In the example shown in the figure, the execution timing of “timing B” is a timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed, and “timing B” is also selected as the execution timing of the notice effect. In this case, the execution timing of “timing B” may not be selectable. According to this, a player's attention to each production can be collected. In the example shown in FIG. 50A, an example in which a failure effect is executed as a pseudo-joint effect is shown, but the same applies to a case where a success effect is executed. Similarly to the case of determining the execution timing of the special display effect, “timing B” can be selected as the execution timing of the notice effect when executing the success effect, and “timing B” when executing the failure effect. "May not be selectable (when the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect execution period and the notice effect execution period is determined as the execution timing, it may be determined in the same manner as the special display effect) .

  FIG. 50B is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed at “timing 2” in FIG. 44 (see FIG. 46). As shown in the drawing, when the special display effect is executed at “timing 2”, any timing of “timing A”, “timing C”, and “timing D” other than “timing B” is set as the execution timing of the notice effect. ("Timing B" cannot be selected). That is, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the execution timing of the notice effect with reference to the execution timing determination table C shown in FIG. 49C in the process of step S90906 of FIG. In the illustrated example, the end timing of the special display effect and the end timing of the pseudo-joint effect are the same timing, but this is an example, and different timings may be used.

  FIG. 50C is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed at “timing 3” in FIG. 44 (see FIG. 46). As shown in the figure, when the special display effect is executed at “timing 3”, any timing of “timing A”, “timing B”, and “timing D” other than “timing C” is set as the execution timing of the notice effect. ("Timing C" cannot be selected). That is, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the execution timing of the notice effect with reference to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIG. 49D in the process of step S90906 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, the execution timing of “timing D” is set as an execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not overlap. That is, the execution timing of “timing D” is an execution timing that can be selected in common regardless of the execution timing of the special display effect. Therefore, when the notice effect is executed at a timing according to the execution timing of the special display effect, and when the notice effect is executed regardless of the execution timing of the special display effect (and even when the special display effect is not executed), the notice is given at a common timing. There is a case where an effect is executed, and the range of the effect can be widened.

  As described above, in the special display effect, after a result indicating success as the effect result of the predetermined effect is displayed, the special display change notification for notifying that the icon as the special display is displayed is continuously performed for a predetermined period. It is suggested that it is advantageous for the player. Nevertheless, if the notice effect is executed within a predetermined period from when it is notified that the icon is displayed until the icon is displayed (special display changes), the effect of the special display effect is reduced. End up. Therefore, as illustrated, the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not superimposed is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect. This restricts execution of the notice effect within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, thereby preventing the effect from being reduced. In this embodiment, the execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed cannot be selected, and the predetermined time period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed is displayed. Although the example of prohibiting the execution of the notice effect is shown, it may be possible to select the execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed. The notice effect may be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as a transparent display. That is, the restriction on the execution of the notice effect includes not only the case where it is not executed but also the case where it is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Further, as described above, even when the special display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed). ) Since the special display effect is finished as it is, an event that the effect of the special display effect is reduced does not occur. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to select the execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed (it is not necessary to limit the execution of the notice effect).

  Returning to FIG. 41, after executing the notice effect execution setting process in step S90560, the effect control CPU 90120 executes other effects such as an effect indicating whether or not to reach or a chance up notice performed in the reach state. Whether or not to perform and other effect settings for determining the type of effect to be executed are made, and an effect control pattern to be used is selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90561). The CPU 90120 for effect control corresponds to, for example, a plurality of patterns prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the special display effect or the notice effect determined in steps S90559 and S90560. Any one of the production control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern. Subsequently, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 90122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S90562).

  Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 905 is performed (step S90563). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S90561 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the display area. After executing the process of step S90563, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90564), and then the variable display start setting process. Exit.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S90172 of FIG. 40 as the variable display effect process. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 51 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step S90801). The effect control CPU 90120 updates, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), and when an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90801; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is a special display effect period for executing the special display effect (step S90802). ). If the special display effect period is determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in step S90561 in accordance with the execution presence and timing of the special display effect determined in step S90559 in FIG. Good.

  When it is determined that it is the special display effect period (step S90802; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect control of the special display effect (step S90803). Thereby, a special display effect is executed. Specifically, in the process of step S90803, as described above, a special effect as a mini-game is performed, and after showing success as a result of the predetermined effect, a special notification that an icon as a special display is displayed is displayed. Display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon of the mode determined in step S90603 in FIG. 42 is displayed (special display changes). In addition, when the effect result of a predetermined effect shows failure, it is not necessary to perform special display change notification after the predetermined effect indicating failure is performed in the process of step S90803 (the icon may not be displayed). ).

  After performing the process of step S9083, or when it is determined in step S90802 that it is not the special display effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the notice effect period for executing the notice effect. Determination is made (step S90802). The notice effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90561 in response to the determination of the presence / absence and timing of the notice effect in the process of step S90560 of FIG. When it is determined that it is the notice effect period (step S90804; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect control of the notice effect (step S90805). Thereby, the notice effect is executed.

  After performing the process of step S90805, or when it is determined in step S90804 that it is not the notice effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 is a reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (step S90806). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined that it is the reach effect period (step S90806; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 performs control for executing the reach effect, such as displaying a background image for reach effect (step S90807).

  After execution of the process of step S90807, or when it is determined in step S90806 that it is not the reach production period (step S90806; No), the production control CPU 90120 performs setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. Based on this, control for executing an effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbols is performed (step S90808), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S90801; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90809). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S90809; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits.

  When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S90809 (step S90809; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120, for example, transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. Control is performed to derive and display a final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) that is a display result in variable symbol display (step S90810). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a jackpot start designation command reception waiting time (step S90811). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S90812), and ends the effect processing during variable display.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when a special display effect and a failure effect as a pseudo-joint effect are executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation in the case where the special display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 1” illustrated in FIG. When variable display is started as shown in FIG. 52A, a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a special display effect is started as shown in FIG. 52B. In the illustrated example, a mode in which a character appears as a predetermined performance and shows success by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined performance. It may be. In addition, as a result of a predetermined effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above.

  When the predetermined effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 52 (c) to 52 (d) and success is shown as the result of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 52 (e), FIG. 52 (f) shows. As shown, notification that an icon is displayed as a special display change notification is issued (special display change notification is executed). The special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period. Then, when a predetermined period elapses, an icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. In the example shown in the figure, since the “pattern A” mode is shown, a star-shaped icon is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (h), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. As shown in FIG. 52 (i), “middle” is displayed. In the decorative symbol display area 905 </ b> C, a pseudo-joint effect is performed to determine whether or not a “re” mark is temporarily displayed as a pseudo-chance pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (j), a failure effect is executed as a pseudo-continuous production effect, and a “re” mark as a pseudo-continuous chance symbol enters a reach state without temporarily stopping display. In the illustrated example, the reach state is shown after the pseudo-continuous effect (failure effect). However, the reach state may not be reached after the failure effect. In the example shown in FIG. 52 (j), the display position of the icon display as the special display is moved, but the display position may not be moved. At this time, the priority of display may or may not prioritize icon display.

  Thus, when a failure effect is executed as a pseudo-continuous effect, a special display effect is determined in order to determine a timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect. The execution period and the execution period of failure production do not overlap. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged due to the fact that the failure production is performed after it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed (changes), and it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating. Note that the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect does not overlap with the execution period of the special display effect may be the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect does not overlap with the execution timing of the failure effect. . That is, instead of adjusting the execution timing of the special display effect, the execution timing of the failure effect may be adjusted. Specifically, the execution timing of the failure effect may be selected from a plurality of preset timings so that the execution period of the specific effect and the execution period of the failure effect do not overlap.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when a special display effect and a successful effect as a pseudo-joint effect are executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation in the case where a special display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 2” shown in FIG. 46B and a pseudo-continuous effect of a successful effect is performed is shown. Note that FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (f) are the same as FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (f), and a description thereof will be omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 53, since the success effect is performed as the pseudo-joint effect, the pseudo-joint effect is executed even after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (g), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. As shown in FIG. A pseudo-joint effect is performed in which whether or not a “re” mark is temporarily displayed as a pseudo-success chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905C. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (i), a success effect is executed as a pseudo-joint effect, and a “re” mark as a pseudo-continuous chance symbol is temporarily displayed. Then, as a result of re-change and a predetermined period of time, an icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. 53 (j). In the illustrated example, an icon as a special display is displayed after a predetermined period at the time of re-variation, but the elapsed timing of the predetermined period (that is, the timing of the special display change) is earlier. It may be. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 (h), a predetermined period may elapse during execution of the pseudo-joint effect, and icon display as a special display may be performed. Further, when a success effect is performed as a pseudo-joint effect and a special display effect is performed, the elapsed timing of the predetermined period may be set to the same timing as the end timing of the pseudo-joint effect. Further, the end timing of the pseudo-joint effect and the elapse timing of the predetermined period may be determined independently. In this way, when the success effect is executed as the pseudo-joint effect, the player is not discouraged, so the timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect and the execution period of the special display effect overlap Can be determined as the execution timing of the specific performance.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the special display effect and the notice effect are executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation in the case where the special display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 1” shown in FIG. 50A and the notice effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing B” thereafter. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 50A, an example in which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect are superimposed is shown. However, in the example shown in FIG. An example of the production operation of the pseudo-continuous production is omitted.

  When variable display is started as shown in FIG. 54A, a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a special display effect is started as shown in FIG. 54B. In the illustrated example, a mode in which a character appears as a predetermined performance and shows success by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined performance. It may be. In addition, as a result of a predetermined effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above. When the predetermined effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 54 (c) to 54 (d) and success is shown as the result of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 54 (e), FIG. 54 (f) shows. As shown, notification that an icon is displayed as a special display change notification is issued (special display change notification is executed). The special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period. Then, when a predetermined period elapses, an icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. In the example shown in the figure, since the “pattern A” mode is shown, a star-shaped icon is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (h), a cut-in notice is performed as a notice effect. In addition to the example shown in the figure, a cut-in notice in a different mode may be executed depending on the ratio of “big hit”, or a step-up notice or a battle effect may be performed in addition to the cut-in notice. It may be.

  Thus, when the special display effect is executed, the execution period of the special display effect and the notice are determined in order to determine the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not superimposed as the notice effect execution timing. The production execution period does not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being reduced due to the announcement effect being performed during a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (changed). .

  FIG. 55 shows an example of the rendering operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing “X” shown in FIG. Specifically, from the main board 9011 side, an abnormal command indicating that a winning to a variable winning device that is not actually opened is detected (winning abnormality) is indicated by the timing “X” shown in FIG. The example at the time of receiving at the timing after the special display change alert | report in special display effect was performed is shown. As shown in FIG. 55A, when the abnormal command is received at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 50 after the special display change notification is performed, the abnormal command is received in step S9075 shown in FIG. The abnormality notification process is performed in the process of step S9076. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), an abnormality notification in a mode according to the type of the received abnormal command is performed by the processing (in the illustrated example, an example of displaying the “abnormal winning abnormality!” Message is shown). However, a warning sound or a lamp may be turned on in addition, or a different mode of notification may be performed according to a preset importance level of abnormality). Thereafter, after the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, an icon as a special display is displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (c) (the special display changes). In the illustrated example, the abnormality notification is deleted at the timing shown in FIG. 55C. However, the abnormality notification is continuously performed until the operation for canceling the abnormality notification is performed. May be. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to notify an abnormality even within a predetermined period after it is notified that an icon as a special display is displayed (changed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  FIG. 56 shows an example of the effect operation in the case where the effect setting is made by the player at the timing “X” shown in FIG. Specifically, an example in which the player performs an operation to increase the volume of the effect at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 50 (the timing after the special display change notification in the special display effect is performed). Show. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), after the special display change notification is performed, when the effect setting is performed at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. It is determined in step S9077 that the effect setting has been performed, and the effect setting process is performed in the process of step S9078. As a result of this processing, notification that the volume setting has been changed as shown in FIG. 56B (in the example shown, the volume has been changed from “6” to “7”) is notified (setting change notification). ) And a process of increasing the volume output by the effect. Thereafter, after the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, an icon as a special display is displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (c) (the special display changes). As shown in the figure, it is desirable that the notification that the volume setting has been changed is displayed in such a manner that the special display change notification and the special display are not recognized by the player. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to make settings related to effects even within a predetermined period after it is notified that an icon as a special display is displayed (changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the production effect. When the abnormality notification and the setting change notification are performed during the same period, the abnormality notification may be given priority (for example, the abnormality notification layer is set to the player side over the setting change layer). . Further, depending on the type of abnormality, there may be a priority that is not given priority over the setting change notification.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the following effects can be obtained.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect. Therefore, the execution of the failure effect is restricted in a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes), and the deterioration of the game entertainment is prevented. In addition, the timing set before the execution period of the pseudo-joint effect may not be selected as the execution timing of the special display effect, and according to this, an icon as a special display is displayed (the special display changes). Since the execution of the failure effect is restricted after the notification is made, it is possible to further prevent the gaming interest from deteriorating. Also, when a special display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed, and a special display change that notifies that an icon as a special display is displayed when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success The notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed in the manner determined in step S90603 in FIG. 42 (the special display changes). The effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect. Therefore, the execution of the failure effect is restricted during a period from when success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect until the icon is displayed (special display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, when executing the special display effect, the effect control CPU 90120 determines icons (combination of icons) to be displayed at different ratios according to the variable display result. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which icon is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the notice effect. Accordingly, the execution of the notice effect is restricted during a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes), and a reduction in the effect of the effect can be prevented. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can notify the abnormality even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can make settings related to the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the production effect. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that the setting related to the effect has been changed when the setting related to the effect is made (setting change notification). Therefore, the production effect can be improved.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may not have all the technical features described in the above embodiment, and the one described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. The structure of the part may be provided. Further, at least some of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, it has been described that the predetermined effect as a mini game always indicates success, but the effect result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure. In the above embodiment, an example in which the predetermined effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 52 and the like is performed is shown. However, there may be a plurality of predetermined effects, for example, two runners as shown in FIG. May compete (perform a race effect). FIG. 57 shows an example of an effect operation when a race effect is performed as a predetermined effect. Specifically, each runner is distinguished by its color. Each runner has a degree of expectation as to whether or not the predetermined performance is successful. The colors of each runner are blue, green, red, and rainbow. The success expectation is high in the order of rainbow> red> green> blue, and the race direction is the character of two runners with different success expectations (here: , Which are distinguished by color), it is only necessary to perform a race (competition), and either one wins, so that the success or failure of the predetermined performance is notified (the success expectation that the winning runner has this time) It is reported as a jackpot expectation). The race effect may be performed a plurality of times. Green and blue runners with a relatively low success expectation as the result of the predetermined performance belong to the first group, and rainbow and red runners with a relatively high success expectation as the result of the predetermined effect belong to the second group. Shall belong. The race effect is an effect for winning any one of the runners, and is also a kind of selection effect for selecting the one runner. Moreover, in the race production, both runners appearing may stop the race (a mode in which neither is selected).

  In this example, in a race production in which at least one of a blue runner and a green runner belonging to the first group in which the success expectation of the predetermined production is relatively low appears, the ratio of both runners canceling the race (first cancellation ratio) ) Rather than a race run where red runners and rainbow runners belonging to the second group appear to have a relatively high degree of success expectation of the predetermined stage as shown in FIG. 57 (that is, blue and green belonging to the first group) In the race production in which no runners appear), the rate at which both runners stop the race (second stop rate) is set higher. Thereby, even when the success expectation degree of a predetermined production is low, the race production in which a red runner and a rainbow runner appear can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced. In particular, the ratio of “losing” is usually higher than the ratio of “big hit” as the variable display result, and the production result as the predetermined production often ends in failure (assuming that the special display production was executed) However, there are many cases where the performance result of the predetermined performance is unsuccessful.) With the above configuration, the appearance rate of the race performance in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear can be increased. Since it is expected that the degree of success expectation of the predetermined production is high every time the race production in which the runner and the rainbow runner appear is executed, the production effect can be enhanced. When a selection effect such as a race effect (as described above, a race effect is a type of selection effect) is executed, conventionally, an option is not selected from the presented options (runner color). Had a high success expectation (high expectation) that was not usually selected. However, as described above, usually, the variable display result is rarely a “big hit”, and the result of the effect as the predetermined effect often ends in failure, so the player touches the highly expected effect. This is rare and the production effect is not enhanced. Therefore, the production of the race (the run including both runners cancels) and the relationship between the first stop ratio and the second stop ratio suggests high expectations (red runner and rainbow runner appear) The production effect is enhanced because the race production) is easy to be executed.

  In this example, as an example of the predetermined effect as a mini game, the above-described race effect is executed and an effect of notifying the success expectation of the predetermined effect is shown as an example. However, the race effect is not a predetermined effect in the special display effect. In addition, it may be executed as an effect of notifying the variable display jackpot expectation level being executed (the effect of notifying the jackpot expectation level of the winning runner as the current jackpot expectation level). According to this, even in a variable display with a low jackpot expectation level, it is possible to execute a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group having a relatively high jackpot expectation level appear, and the effect can be achieved. Can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which an icon as a special image is displayed as a special display effect. In addition to the icon being displayed as a special display effect, as described above, a meter as a special display effect. You may perform the production which changes a display (it increases in steps). Moreover, the effect (active display change effect) which changes the aspect of the active display corresponding to a variable display according to the said special display effect may be performed. Furthermore, at the time of super reach production (super reach production), the active display mode and the special display mode may be changed to a special mode. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the active display change effect in this example, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to “first mode (blue)”, “second mode (green)” and “third”. It suffices if the display can be changed to “mode (red)”. When the final display mode of the meter display as the special display is “first stage” or “second stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “first mode (blue)”, and the meter display When the final display mode of “3rd stage” or “4th stage” is set, the final display mode of active display is “second mode (green)”, and the final display mode of meter display is “10th stage”. When “stage” is reached, the final display mode of the active display is “third mode (red)”.

  58, the special display effect is performed, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first display mode, and the active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first mode according to the change of the meter display is executed. An example of the presentation operation in the case of being performed. As shown in FIG. 58A, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 58 (A), the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), when the special display effect is executed, the effect of blinking and displaying the meter display 9090 is executed as the predetermined effect. Then, character A 90200 appears (FIG. 58C), and the display mode of the meter display changes to the first stage display mode in which the color of one scale among 10 changes (FIG. 58D). Thereafter, according to the change in meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed to the first mode (in the example of FIG. 58E, the color is indicated by characters) and displayed (FIG. 58 ( E)).

  Next, specific examples of the super reach effect, the special display effect, and the active display change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Among these, FIG. 59 shows an example of the effect operation when the super reach effect is executed independently (the special display effect and the active display change effect are not executed). FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 show an example of the effect operation when the special display effect and the active display change effect are executed when the super reach effect is executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, the case where a super reach production is performed independently will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 59A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the “left” decorative design is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the “right” decorative design is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (C), and the left and right decorative designs are displayed. Are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, symbol “7”), and a reach state occurs. Next, at the time of development to super reach, a character display such as “super reach!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (D), and the race of the racing car is started as shown in FIG. 59 (E). Such an effect display is started, and a super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 59D to 59G, in this embodiment, during the execution of the super reach effect, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen of the image display device 905. It shall be.

  Next, when the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect is reached during the execution of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the predetermined cut-in effect is executed during the execution of the super reach effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), in the image display device 905, a predetermined character image 90201 that is different from the display effect of the racing car race so far is cut in, and a line such as “chance!” A predetermined cut-in effect is executed in a manner in which the display is displayed. In this example, the predetermined cut-in effect is a part of the super reach effect. For example, as in the above embodiment, the predetermined cut-in effect may be configured as an effect different from the super reach effect. Further, for example, the super reach effect may be interrupted and a predetermined cut-in effect may be executed.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 59A, even when the super reach effect is executed alone, the display of the meter display 9090 is started when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. However, when a predetermined cut-in effect is started, the meter display 9090 is erased as shown in FIG. 59 (F). As such, in this example, the meter display 9090 is displayed until at least the predetermined cut-in effect is started, so the meter that changes the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect and the special display mode to the special mode. It is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether a predetermined cut-in effect or a special change in meter display is executed until the execution timing of a special change in display (details will be described later) is reached. An expectation can be given to the fact that the meter display changes due to a special change. Note that the meter display 9090 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined cut-in effect is started (for example, the meter level does not change). Further, for example, the meter display 9090 may not be displayed when the super reach effect is executed independently and the special display change effect or the active display change effect is not executed.

  Next, when a predetermined cut-in effect execution period has passed, the display again returns to the racing car race effect display, and as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the effect is as if the ally racing car finished first. Display. When the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), the same symbol as the left and right ornament symbols (in this example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed as a “medium” ornament symbol. Is derived and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the case where the special change of meter display and the active display change effect are executed as the special display effect when the super reach effect is executed will be described. In the example of FIGS. 60 and 61, a special change of the meter display is executed as a special display effect, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the tenth stage display mode, and the active display is changed to the third display according to the change of the meter display. In addition, the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display of the third special display mode. In the special display effect, the display mode of the meter display changes to the first display mode in which the color of one scale of 10 changes as shown in FIG. When the special change of the meter display is executed, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the 10th stage display mode. Thus, the special change of the meter display in the special display effect is referred to as a special change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 60A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the “left” decorative design is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the “right” decorative design is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (C), and the “left” and “right” ”Is displayed in a stopped state with the same symbol (in this example, symbol“ 7 ”), and a reach state occurs. Next, at the timing of development to super reach, a character display such as “super reach!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 60D, and the racing car race is started as shown in FIG. Such an effect display is started, and a super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 60D to 60I and FIG. 61J, in this example, the right side of the display screen of the image display device 905 is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect and the special change effect. It is assumed that the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed at the lower end. Next, as shown in FIG. 60F, immediately before the special display effect is started, a notification effect that blinks and displays the meter display 9090 is executed.

  Next, after the start of the super reach effect, when the execution timing of the special change effect as the special display effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the image display device 905 executes the special change effect in such a manner that an effect display is made as if a storm has arrived and thunder is sounding. In this example, the special change effect is different from the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), in the image display device 905, an effect display as if a lightning strike has hit the meter display 9090, and the display mode of the meter display as a special display is 10. The display changes to the tenth display mode in which the color of all of the scales has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 60H, the example of changing to the tenth stage display mode in which the color of all scales has been changed is shown, but it is not necessary to change to the tenth stage display mode at once. For example, a special mini-game effect for changing the display mode is performed while the super-reach effect is interrupted or executed in a low-priority layer, and the level changes depending on the result of the mini-game effect. You may make it different. Moreover, you may change a display mode in steps by performing a mini game effect continuously.

  Next, the super reach production is resumed, and as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the display returns to the race car race production display again, and the display mode of the active display is changed to the third mode (FIG. In the example of 60 (I), the color is indicated by characters). Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), an effect display is displayed as if the teammate's racing car finished first, and the meter display and the active display are the special display (“V”) in the third special display mode. Is displayed in a special display 202) indicating the characters. When the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 61 (K), the same symbols as the left and right effect symbols (in this example, symbol “7”) are stopped and displayed as “medium” ornament symbols. Is derived and displayed.

  In this example, a race car race effect display is performed as a super reach effect, a predetermined character image 90201 is effected as a predetermined cut-in effect, and a storm arrives as a special change effect. Although the case where the effect display as if reverberating is shown is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a super reach effect, a battle effect in which an enemy and a friend character perform a battle may be executed, or a moving image of a predetermined story may be displayed, and various effects can be considered. Further, for example, a button effect accompanied by a button operation or the like may be executed as a predetermined cut-in effect, as long as a display different from the previous effect display during the super reach effect is cut in in some form. . In addition, for example, an effect display in which a character different from the meter display change effect may appear as a special change effect, or a button effect accompanied by a button operation may be performed, and various effects can be considered.

  According to this, the display (meter display in this example) which suggests an expectation degree can be displayed by changing a mode in a plurality of stages as a special display. In addition, when a specific effect (in this example, a super reach effect) is executed, a special change effect (in this example, a special change in meter display in the special display effect) can be executed to change the special display mode. It is. Also, in this case, the special change effect can be executed in a mode that has priority over the specific effect (in this example, the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed). Therefore, the aspect of the special display can be changed according to the aspect that has priority over the specific effect, so that even when the specific effect is executed, it is possible to focus attention on the change of the aspect of the special display. That is, if both the specific effect and the change in the special display mode are executed, the player may pay attention to the specific effect and cannot fully pay attention to the change in the special display. Since the aspect of the special display can be changed according to the aspect, the change in the aspect of the special display can be noticed even when the specific effect is executed. In addition, in this example, an example in which an effect of changing the meter display (increase in steps) as a special display effect is executed and an active display change effect is performed in accordance with the special display effect is shown. Instead of this, the icons shown in the above embodiment may be displayed. For example, when displaying icons step by step, a special change in meter display is executed as a special display effect, and when the display mode changes from the normal mode to the 10th level display mode, the display mode of the active display is third. Instead of being displayed in a mode (in the example of FIG. 60 (I), the color is indicated by characters), the icon is displayed in the highest mode (the mode with the highest expectation level of jackpot). May be.

  In this example, the display mode of the active display changes according to the change of the meter display. However, for example, the display mode of any one of the pending displays changes according to the change of the meter display. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it may be realized by associating and executing a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the hold display and the special display effect (including the special change effect) based on the command at the time of starting winning. Specifically, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the hold display are determined based on the command at the start winning prize, and the effect is executed based on the determination result. Also, in the case where the display mode of any hold display changes corresponding to the meter display, a special display effect (in the period from when the hold display is displayed until the corresponding variable display starts) (Including special change effects) may be executable.

  In addition, for example, the display mode of the hold display can be changed by the pre-reading effect, and when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode is active according to the display mode. You may make it display a display. Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display). . In this case, the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change in the meter display, and the active display that takes over the display mode of the hold display changes according to the further change in the meter display. Good. In this case, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the active display may be determined based on a command at the time of start winning at the time of starting winning, or may be determined in the variable display start setting process. Also good. In this case, a special display effect (including a special change effect) may be executable during a period from when the hold display is displayed to when the corresponding variable display ends.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the setting regarding an effect is also possible within the predetermined period after it was alert | reported that the icon as a special display was displayed, and the volume of an effect is changed as an example of the setting regarding the said effect. However, the setting related to the production is not limited to this. The setting related to the performance may be performed based on an operation by the player, and for example, the selection of the music to be output or the type of background may be changed. In addition, the setting related to the production may include setting the auto button function to be valid or invalid.

  Note that the “auto button” is a function that executes processing assuming that the push button 9031B is operated, although the push button 9031B is not actually operated by the player. In this example, the button notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation or the repeated operation of the push button 9031B in the button notice effect. When the function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the process is executed as if the push button 9031B is operated once or repeatedly in the button notice effect, and a notice display is displayed. . In this example, the single operation is that the push button 9031B is operated once, and the continuous operation is that the push button 9031B is operated a plurality of times in succession.

  Further, in this embodiment, “automatic striking” means that the push button 9031B is actually continuously pressed (long-pressed) by the player, but the push button 9031B is also pressed multiple times. This is a function of detecting that the button is continuously pressed (a state where the button is continuously pressed (a state where the push button 9031B is pressed and a state where the push button 9031B is not pressed is repeated a plurality of times)). In this example, when the function of the auto button is invalid, a notice display may be displayed based on detection of a continuous hit operation of the push button 9031B in the button notice effect, but the push button 9031B is long pressed. Even in this case, a notice display is displayed on the assumption that the continuous hitting operation has been detected.

  In this example, the effect setting process in step S9078 of FIG. 39 is executed, so that an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during which a customer waiting demonstration is displayed, a period during which a decorative symbol is variably displayed, During the period, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button based on the operation of the push button 9031B by the player. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 56, an example is shown in which the volume setting is changed by the player at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 50. However, the auto button function is enabled as an effect setting instead of the volume setting. It is possible to set whether or not to be invalid. That is, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button even within a predetermined period after notification that the icon as a special display is displayed. Note that it is also possible to display whether the auto button is valid or invalid even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed. In this example, the automatic continuous hitting function is always valid. However, as with the auto button function, it may be configured to enable or disable the setting.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the auto button function is set to be valid or invalid. In FIG. 62, the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3). In FIG. 62 (1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is disabled. As shown in FIG. 62 (1), when the player presses the push button 9031B for a long time while the decorative symbol variable display is being executed, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), the auto button The image display device 905 displays a character string such as “auto button enabled” and displays that the auto button function is enabled. In addition, at this time, it is only necessary to perform control for outputting the auto button effective sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R and causing the push button 9031B to emit light in a special light emission mode.

  Further, when the auto button function is set to be valid and the player performs a pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 9031B, as shown in FIG. 62 (3), the auto button function is disabled. In addition, a character string such as “auto button invalid” is displayed on the image display device 905, and a display indicating that the function of the auto button is set to invalid is performed. At this time, it is only necessary to perform control for outputting the auto button invalid effect sound from the speakers 908L and 908R and causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode.

  In the example of FIG. 62, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the decorative display of the decorative design. However, as described above, by performing the same operation, not only during the variable display of the decorative design, The setting of the auto button function can be changed even during a customer waiting demonstration period or a jackpot game period. For example, when the setting of the auto button function is changed from the menu screen, the image display device 905 displays that the auto button function has been disabled or enabled as in the example shown in FIG. Control to output the auto button invalid effect sound or auto button effective effect sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, or to control the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode or the special light emission mode. May be.

  Next, the difference between the case where the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation is performed and the case where the automatic continuous hit by the auto button function is performed will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation and automatic continuous hitting by an auto button function. In the example shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that execution of the button notice effect A is determined as the button notice effect.

  In “button notice effect A” and “button notice effect B”, when the operation valid period is started, a gauge display corresponding to the number of operations of the push button 9031B is displayed, and the operation of the push button 9031B is detected. Each time, the display is updated so that the scale of the gauge display is reduced by one. When the number of detected operations reaches a predetermined number of times (that is, when the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied, and a notice display (for example, “Intense heat!” Or “Chance! "Is displayed).

  When the function of the auto button is invalid and execution of the button notice effect A is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button notice effect, the long press operation is started. When 4 seconds have elapsed, detection by automatic continuous hitting is started, and during the detection by automatic continuous hitting, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is treated as being increased by one each time 1.0 second has elapsed. In addition, when the execution of the button notice effect B is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button notice effect, the automatic operation is performed when 2 seconds elapse after the start of the long press operation. Detection by repeated hitting is started, and during the detection by automatic repeated hitting, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is treated as being increased by one every 0.5 seconds. Note that, regardless of whether the button notice effect A or the button notice effect B is executed, every time a push operation of the push button 9031B is detected when a normal continuous operation of the push button 9031B is performed. The number of operations is treated as increasing by one.

  Further, if the function of the auto button is valid, when the button notice effect A is executed, even if the push button 9031B is not pressed for a long time, 1.0 second has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. Every time the operation is performed, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is treated as being increased by one. Further, when the button notice effect B is executed, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is increased every 0.5 seconds from the start of the operation valid period even if the push button 9031B is not pressed for a long time. Treated as incremented by one. Although details will be described later, when the button notice effect C is executed, even when the push button 9031B is not operated, a predetermined timing in the middle of the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period is 6 seconds). In this case, when it reaches 3 seconds from the start of the operation valid period, it is treated that the number of operations by the push button 9031B has been performed once.

  For example, depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic repeated hit start time and the automatic repeated hit detection period may be selected from a plurality of options at different ratios. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic continuous hitting start time is determined as 0 second at a rate of 50%, and determined as 2 seconds at a rate of 50%. May be determined at 0% at a rate of 70% and at 2% at a rate of 30%. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic repeated hit detection interval is determined to be 0.5 seconds at a rate of 70%, and is determined to be 1 second at a rate of 30%. In this case, it may be determined to be 0.5 seconds at a rate of 50% and to be determined to be 1 second at a rate of 50%. In addition, depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or not, for the configuration to select the automatic repeated hit start time and automatic repeated hit detection period from multiple choices at different rates, the automatic repeated hit with the auto button function and the long press operation It may be applied to only one of automatic repeated hits by or may be applied to both.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by a long press operation, a predetermined start waiting period after the long press operation of the push button 31 is started after the start of the operation effective period. After 4 seconds (in this example), the continuous hit determination is turned on (that is, the process is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation is performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), when the automatic repeated hitting is performed by the auto button function, the repeated hitting determination is turned on immediately after the start of the operation effective period (that is, the operation effective period Immediately after the start, the process is executed assuming that the hammering operation is being performed repeatedly, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the production (for example, reduction in the scale of the gauge display) ) Can be performed at different timings, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, when the execution of the button notice effect B is determined, when the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation is performed, the long press operation of the push button 9031B is performed after the start of the operation valid period. When a predetermined start waiting period (in this example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start, the continuous hit determination is turned on, and when automatic continuous hit is performed by the auto button function, the continuous hit is immediately after the start of the operation effective period. Judgment is turned on. For this reason, in both cases of button announcement effects A and B, the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. The timing at which (for example, a reduction in the scale of the gauge display) is executed is different.

  In the above embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, it has been described that the predetermined effect as a mini-game always indicates success, but the effect result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure, and execution of the predetermined effect Depending on the timing, the rate at which the performance results of the predetermined performance indicate success may be different. Specifically, since the execution timing of the predetermined effect varies depending on the execution timing of the special display effect, it is only necessary that the ratio at which the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success depends on the execution timing of the special display effect. In addition, for example, even when the special display effect is executed at the execution timing of “Timing 1” shown in FIG. 46, the execution timing of the predetermined effect may be plural. Depending on, the ratio of the production results indicating success may be varied. According to this, the player's attention can be gathered with respect to the start timing of the predetermined effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the ratio of the variable display result to “big hit” differs according to the combination of icons displayed as a special display is just an example. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing an active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display corresponding to variable display and a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the active display or the hold display, The ratio at which the variable display result is “big hit” may be different depending on the combination of display modes (number and combination of icons). According to this, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the icon as the special display is displayed by determining the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution time of the notice effect. In the example, the execution of the notice effect is limited in a predetermined period after the change is notified. For example, although the notice effect is restricted, the expectation of jackpot as one notification is extremely high (here, The “big hit” is determined), and a special effect can be executed. The special effect is not limited even in a predetermined period after it is notified that an icon as a special display is displayed (the special display changes). Also good. In this case, with respect to the execution timing of the special effect, for example, referring to a table in which the timing for superimposing the execution period of the special display effect is not selectable as shown in FIG. The timing may be determined from a plurality of timings. Note that the special effect may be an effect in which the hold display is changed by the player's operation in addition to the one-shot notification. According to this, there is a sharpness between the effect that is restricted and the effect that is not so, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the example of the execution of the notice effect is shown as an example in which the execution of the notice effect is not performed (prohibited), but also includes a case where the notice effect is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In the case of executing without performing prohibition of execution of the notice effect, if the icon display as a special display is prioritized over the notice effect (for example, the icon display layer is set to the player side over the layer of the notice effect) Good. According to this, it can prevent that a player becomes difficult to visually recognize a special display, and can improve a production effect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the example which can alert | report abnormality was shown within the predetermined period after it was alert | reported that the icon as a special display was displayed, this is an example. In addition to the abnormality notification, it is only necessary to be able to appropriately notify information relating to the game as a special notification, such as a hitting notification, a ball notification, and a fourth symbol. It should be noted that the ball notification is a recognizable display of the number of balls that the player has acquired (the number of balls that have been acquired), and the special notification only needs to be updated each time the number of balls that have been acquired increases. Usually, the number of winning balls is displayed on the high base and is updated after a big hit, so it is updated within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as a special display is displayed. However, for the payout due to the game ball winning in the winning opening during the high base, the number of winning balls may be updated, which is applicable in such a case. Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that increases the number of player's winnings by frequently setting the variable display result to “small hit” during the high base. According to this, it becomes possible to update the number of obtained balls even within a predetermined period after it is notified that an icon as a special display is displayed, and it is possible to suitably inform the player of the number of earned balls. . Note that the hitting notification only needs to be a recognizable display of the area where the game ball is launched to the player, such as right-handed notification and left-handed notification. Moreover, the 4th symbol should just display so that a player can recognize whether it is variably displaying by blinking a lamp, for example.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous, one change pattern command is given when the change is started. Although an example of transmission is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the effect control in the change display may be performed based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 9012 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, or lighting patterns of segments not limited to numbers and symbols, etc. An example of variable display is shown. However, the variable display result displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B and the special symbol variably displayed are a number indicating "0" to "9" and a symbol indicating "-". It is not limited to what consists of etc. For example, a lighting pattern during variable display of a special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some LEDs are lit (for example, a lost symbol) Are also included in the special symbol variable display (in this case, the one pattern (eg, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Further, the special symbol displayed during variable display may be different from the special symbol displayed as the variable display result. As a special symbol variable display, for example, “−” is blinked, and as a variable display result, other special symbols (“7” for “big hit”, “1” for “losing”, etc. ) Is also included in the special symbol variable display. In addition, the variable display of the decorative design includes a blinking display or scroll display of one type of decorative design. The lighting pattern during the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are lit (for example, a lost symbol). It is also included in the variable display of normal symbols to repeat alternately. Also, the decorative symbol or normal symbol displayed during variable display may be different from the decorative symbol or normal symbol displayed as a variable display result.

  In the above-described embodiment, the ratio (including the determination ratio, etc., the same applies to the probability) may include 0%. In other words, the ratio and probability may be between 0 and 100%. For example, to make one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is, for example, 30%, the other ratio is 70%, and the other ratio is, for example, 0%, and the other ratio is 100%. Including. Further, the sum of one ratio and the other ratio may not be 100% (there may be a part that is not included in either one or the other and may have a predetermined ratio). In addition, when the ratio of the other is higher than the ratio of one, the ratio of one is set to 0% and the ratio of the other is set to 100%. For example, in the above, the variable display pattern selected on the other side is selected on the other side to differentiate the variable display pattern determination rate in the specific period after the advantageous state from the variable display pattern determination ratio outside the specific period. This includes cases where the variable display pattern selected on one side and the variable display pattern selected on the other side partially overlap or do not completely overlap. These may be defined by the contents of a table that defines the ratio.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to the one that performs probability change control in which the big hit type is “probable change” when a big hit symbol indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol. A probability variation determination device type pachinko gaming machine in which probability variation control is performed based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a specific area in an attacker provided in the game machine may be used.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 905, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score or a game machine that is controlled to a big hit game state when passing a specific passing gate. Furthermore, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals etc.), and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived by the variable display device.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Frame 4A, 4B for game machines Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main Board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start port switch 23 Count switch 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 100 Microcomputer 101, 121 ROM for game control
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 CPU for effect control
123 Display control unit 901 Pachinko gaming machine 902 Game board 903 Special frame display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 Game Effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Audio control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start port switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101 , 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of variable display and control to an advantageous state,
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display related to variable display;
Action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by acting an effect image on the specific display;
Special display means for performing special display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage;
Special notification executing means capable of executing special notification for notifying information related to a game,
The action effect execution means varies the start position of the action effect according to the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the action effect,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period has elapsed after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed,
The special notification execution means can execute the special notification even in a predetermined period after it is notified that the display mode of the special display is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.